Lexmark Printer 032 User Manual
X925  
User's Guide  
November 2012  
www.lexmark.com  
Machine type(s):  
7541  
Model(s):  
032, 036, 096  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
3
Attaching cables......................................................................................................................................60  
Verifying printer setup............................................................................................................................61  
Printing a menu settings page ..........................................................................................................................61  
Printing a network setup page..........................................................................................................................61  
Setting up the printer software...............................................................................................................61  
Installing the printer software ..........................................................................................................................61  
Updating available options in the printer driver ..............................................................................................62  
Setting up wireless printing.....................................................................................................................63  
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network.....................................................................................63  
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)...................................................................................64  
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh).................................................................................66  
Installing the printer on an Ethernet network........................................................................................68  
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port......................................71  
Setting up serial printing.........................................................................................................................72  
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact........................................75  
Saving paper and toner...........................................................................................................................75  
Using recycled paper ........................................................................................................................................75  
Conserving supplies ..........................................................................................................................................75  
Saving energy..........................................................................................................................................76  
Using Eco‑Mode................................................................................................................................................76  
Reducing printer noise......................................................................................................................................76  
Adjusting Sleep Mode.......................................................................................................................................77  
Using Hibernate Mode......................................................................................................................................78  
Adjusting the brightness of the display ............................................................................................................78  
Setting the standard exit bin light.....................................................................................................................79  
Recycling..................................................................................................................................................79  
Recycling Lexmark products .............................................................................................................................79  
Recycling Lexmark packaging............................................................................................................................80  
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling........................................................................................80  
Loading paper and specialty media............................................................81  
Setting the paper size and type...............................................................................................................81  
Configuring Universal paper settings......................................................................................................81  
Loading the standard or optional 550‑sheet tray...................................................................................82  
Loading the multipurpose feeder............................................................................................................86  
Linking and unlinking trays......................................................................................................................88  
Linking trays......................................................................................................................................................88  
Unlinking trays..................................................................................................................................................88  
Creating a custom name for a paper type ........................................................................................................89  
Assigning a custom paper type name...............................................................................................................89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
4
Configuring a custom name..............................................................................................................................89  
Paper and specialty media guidelines.........................................................90  
Paper guidelines......................................................................................................................................90  
Paper characteristics.........................................................................................................................................90  
Unacceptable paper..........................................................................................................................................91  
Selecting paper .................................................................................................................................................91  
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead ......................................................................................................91  
Using recycled paper and other office papers..................................................................................................91  
Storing paper ....................................................................................................................................................92  
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights.............................................................................................93  
Supported paper sizes ......................................................................................................................................93  
Supported paper types and weights.................................................................................................................95  
Printing......................................................................................................96  
Printing a document................................................................................................................................96  
Printing a document .........................................................................................................................................96  
Printing in black and white ...............................................................................................................................96  
Adjusting toner darkness..................................................................................................................................96  
Printing from a mobile device...........................................................................................................................97  
Printing from a flash drive.......................................................................................................................97  
Printing from a flash drive ................................................................................................................................97  
Supported flash drives and file types................................................................................................................98  
Printing on specialty media.....................................................................................................................99  
Tips on using letterhead ...................................................................................................................................99  
Tips on using transparencies ............................................................................................................................99  
Tips on using envelopes..................................................................................................................................100  
Tips on using labels.........................................................................................................................................100  
Tips on using card stock..................................................................................................................................101  
Printing confidential and other held jobs..............................................................................................101  
Storing print jobs in the printer ......................................................................................................................101  
Printing confidential and other held jobs .......................................................................................................102  
Printing information pages....................................................................................................................102  
Printing a font sample list...............................................................................................................................102  
Printing a directory list....................................................................................................................................103  
Using Max Speed and Max Yield...........................................................................................................103  
Canceling a print job..............................................................................................................................103  
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel......................................................................................103  
Canceling a print job from the computer .......................................................................................................104  
Copying....................................................................................................105  
Making copies.......................................................................................................................................105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
5
Making a quick copy .......................................................................................................................................105  
Copying using the ADF....................................................................................................................................105  
Copying using the scanner glass .....................................................................................................................106  
Copying film photos........................................................................................................................................106  
Copying on specialty media...................................................................................................................106  
Copying on transparencies .............................................................................................................................106  
Copying on letterhead ....................................................................................................................................106  
Customizing copy settings.....................................................................................................................107  
Copying to a different size ..............................................................................................................................107  
Making copies using paper from a selected tray ............................................................................................107  
Copying different paper sizes .........................................................................................................................108  
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing).............................................................................................108  
Reducing or enlarging copies..........................................................................................................................109  
Adjusting copy quality ....................................................................................................................................109  
Collating copies...............................................................................................................................................110  
Placing separator sheets between copies.......................................................................................................110  
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet ...................................................................................................111  
Creating a custom copy job (job build)...........................................................................................................111  
Placing information on copies...............................................................................................................112  
Placing the date and time at the top of each page.........................................................................................112  
Placing an overlay message on each page......................................................................................................112  
Canceling a copy job..............................................................................................................................112  
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF.................................................................................112  
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass ................................................................112  
Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed.......................................................................................113  
Understanding the copy screens and options.......................................................................................113  
Copy from .......................................................................................................................................................113  
Copy to............................................................................................................................................................113  
Copies .............................................................................................................................................................113  
Scale................................................................................................................................................................113  
Darkness .........................................................................................................................................................114  
Sides (Duplex) .................................................................................................................................................114  
Collate.............................................................................................................................................................114  
Content ...........................................................................................................................................................114  
Color ...............................................................................................................................................................114  
Advanced Options...........................................................................................................................................115  
Save As Shortcut .............................................................................................................................................115  
E-mailing..................................................................................................116  
Getting ready to e-mail.........................................................................................................................116  
Setting up the e-mail function ........................................................................................................................116  
Configuring e‑mail settings.............................................................................................................................116  
Creating an e-mail shortcut...................................................................................................................117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
6
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server.......................................................................117  
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen.......................................................................................117  
E-mailing a document............................................................................................................................118  
Sending an e-mail using the touch screen ......................................................................................................118  
Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number ................................................................................................... 118  
Sending an e‑mail using the address book .....................................................................................................118  
Customizing e-mail settings...................................................................................................................119  
Adding e-mail subject and message information ...........................................................................................119  
Changing the output file type .........................................................................................................................119  
Canceling an e-mail...............................................................................................................................120  
Understanding e-mail options...............................................................................................................120  
Recipients .......................................................................................................................................................120  
Subject ............................................................................................................................................................120  
Message..........................................................................................................................................................120  
File Name........................................................................................................................................................120  
Original Size ....................................................................................................................................................120  
Resolution.......................................................................................................................................................121  
Color ...............................................................................................................................................................121  
Content ...........................................................................................................................................................121  
Darkness .........................................................................................................................................................121  
Send As ...........................................................................................................................................................121  
Page Setup ......................................................................................................................................................122  
Scan Preview...................................................................................................................................................122  
Advanced Options...........................................................................................................................................122  
Faxing......................................................................................................123  
Getting the printer ready to fax............................................................................................................123  
Initial fax setup ...............................................................................................................................................123  
Choosing a fax connection..............................................................................................................................124  
Connecting to an analog telephone line.........................................................................................................124  
Connecting to a DSL service............................................................................................................................125  
Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system ..............................................................................................................125  
Connecting to a distinctive ring service ..........................................................................................................126  
Connecting to an adapter for your country or region ....................................................................................126  
Setting the outgoing fax or station name and number ..................................................................................127  
Setting the date and time ...............................................................................................................................127  
Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time ................................................................................128  
Creating shortcuts.................................................................................................................................128  
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server...........................................................128  
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen ...........................................................................129  
Sending a fax.........................................................................................................................................129  
Sending a fax using the touch screen .............................................................................................................129  
Sending a fax using the computer ..................................................................................................................129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
7
Sending a fax using shortcuts .........................................................................................................................130  
Sending a fax using the address book.............................................................................................................130  
Customizing fax settings........................................................................................................................131  
Changing the fax resolution............................................................................................................................131  
Making a fax lighter or darker ........................................................................................................................131  
Sending a fax at a scheduled time ..................................................................................................................131  
Viewing a fax log.............................................................................................................................................132  
Blocking junk faxes..........................................................................................................................................132  
Canceling an outgoing fax.....................................................................................................................132  
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning.....................................................................132  
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory...............................................133  
Understanding fax options....................................................................................................................133  
Content ...........................................................................................................................................................133  
Resolution.......................................................................................................................................................133  
Darkness .........................................................................................................................................................134  
Color ...............................................................................................................................................................134  
Page Setup ......................................................................................................................................................134  
Scan Preview...................................................................................................................................................134  
Delayed Send ..................................................................................................................................................134  
Advanced Options...........................................................................................................................................134  
Holding and forwarding faxes...............................................................................................................135  
Holding faxes ..................................................................................................................................................135  
Forwarding a fax .............................................................................................................................................135  
Scanning to an FTP address......................................................................137  
Creating shortcuts.................................................................................................................................137  
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server...........................................................................137  
Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen ...........................................................................................138  
Scanning to an FTP address...................................................................................................................138  
Scanning to an FTP address using the touch screen.......................................................................................138  
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number ....................................................................................138  
Scanning to an FTP address using the address book ......................................................................................139  
Understanding FTP options...................................................................................................................139  
FTP ..................................................................................................................................................................139  
File Name........................................................................................................................................................139  
Original Size ....................................................................................................................................................139  
Send As ...........................................................................................................................................................139  
Color ...............................................................................................................................................................140  
Resolution.......................................................................................................................................................140  
Darkness .........................................................................................................................................................140  
Page Setup ......................................................................................................................................................140  
Content ...........................................................................................................................................................140  
Scan Preview...................................................................................................................................................141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
8
Advanced Options...........................................................................................................................................141  
Scanning to a computer or flash drive......................................................142  
Scanning to a computer........................................................................................................................142  
Scanning to a flash drive........................................................................................................................143  
Understanding the Scan Center features..............................................................................................143  
Using the ScanBack Utility.....................................................................................................................143  
Understanding scan profile options......................................................................................................144  
Original Size ....................................................................................................................................................144  
Resolution.......................................................................................................................................................144  
Color ...............................................................................................................................................................144  
Content ...........................................................................................................................................................144  
Darkness .........................................................................................................................................................145  
Page Setup ......................................................................................................................................................145  
Scan Preview...................................................................................................................................................145  
Advanced Options...........................................................................................................................................145  
Understanding printer menus...................................................................146  
Menus list..............................................................................................................................................146  
Supplies menu.......................................................................................................................................147  
Paper menu...........................................................................................................................................149  
Default Source menu ......................................................................................................................................149  
Paper Size/Type menu....................................................................................................................................150  
Configure MP menu........................................................................................................................................153  
Substitute Size menu ......................................................................................................................................153  
Paper Weight menu........................................................................................................................................153  
Paper Loading menu.......................................................................................................................................155  
Custom Types menu .......................................................................................................................................157  
Custom Names menu .....................................................................................................................................157  
Custom Scan Sizes menu ................................................................................................................................157  
Universal Setup menu.....................................................................................................................................158  
Reports menu........................................................................................................................................158  
Reports menu .................................................................................................................................................158  
Network/Ports menu.............................................................................................................................160  
Active NIC menu .............................................................................................................................................160  
Standard Network or Network [x] menus.......................................................................................................160  
Network Reports menu ..................................................................................................................................162  
Network Card menu........................................................................................................................................162  
TCP/IP menu ...................................................................................................................................................162  
IPv6 menu.......................................................................................................................................................163  
Wireless menu ................................................................................................................................................164  
AppleTalk menu..............................................................................................................................................165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
9
Standard USB menu........................................................................................................................................165  
Parallel [x] menu.............................................................................................................................................167  
Serial [x] menu................................................................................................................................................169  
SMTP Setup menu ..........................................................................................................................................171  
Security menu.......................................................................................................................................172  
Editing Security Setups menu .........................................................................................................................172  
Miscellaneous Security Settings menu ...........................................................................................................173  
Confidential Print menu..................................................................................................................................174  
Disk Wiping menu...........................................................................................................................................175  
Security Audit Log menu.................................................................................................................................176  
Set Date and Time menu ................................................................................................................................177  
Settings menu........................................................................................................................................178  
General Settings menu ...................................................................................................................................178  
Copy Settings menu ........................................................................................................................................187  
Fax Settings menu...........................................................................................................................................191  
E‑mail Settings menu......................................................................................................................................200  
FTP Settings menu ..........................................................................................................................................206  
Flash Drive menu ............................................................................................................................................210  
Print Settings...................................................................................................................................................215  
Help menu.............................................................................................................................................228  
Securing the memory before moving the printer......................................230  
Statement of Volatility..........................................................................................................................230  
Erasing volatile memory........................................................................................................................230  
Erasing non‑volatile memory................................................................................................................231  
Erasing printer hard disk memory.........................................................................................................231  
Configuring printer hard disk encryption..............................................................................................232  
Maintaining the printer............................................................................233  
Cleaning the exterior of the printer......................................................................................................233  
Cleaning the scanner glass....................................................................................................................233  
Cleaning the ADF parts..........................................................................................................................234  
Cleaning the printhead lenses...............................................................................................................235  
Storing supplies.....................................................................................................................................238  
Checking the status of supplies.............................................................................................................239  
Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel .....................................................................239  
Checking the status of supplies from a network computer............................................................................239  
Ordering supplies..................................................................................................................................239  
Ordering toner cartridges ...............................................................................................................................239  
Ordering imaging units ...................................................................................................................................240  
Ordering a fuser or a transfer module............................................................................................................240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
10  
Ordering a waste toner bottle ........................................................................................................................240  
Ordering ADF replacement parts....................................................................................................................241  
Replacing Supplies.................................................................................................................................241  
Replacing an imaging unit...............................................................................................................................241  
Replacing a toner cartridge.............................................................................................................................244  
Replacing the waste toner bottle ...................................................................................................................246  
Moving the printer................................................................................................................................247  
Before moving the printer ..............................................................................................................................247  
Moving the printer to another location..........................................................................................................248  
Shipping the printer........................................................................................................................................248  
Administrative support............................................................................249  
Finding advanced networking and administrator information.............................................................249  
Using the Embedded Web Server.........................................................................................................249  
Checking the virtual display...................................................................................................................249  
Checking the status of the printer.........................................................................................................249  
Setting up e‑mail alerts.........................................................................................................................250  
Viewing reports.....................................................................................................................................250  
Restoring factory default settings.........................................................................................................251  
Clearing jams............................................................................................252  
Avoiding jams........................................................................................................................................252  
Understanding jam numbers and locations..........................................................................................252  
200 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................254  
201 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................255  
203 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................256  
230 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................257  
231–239 paper jams..............................................................................................................................257  
24x paper jam........................................................................................................................................258  
250 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................261  
280–289 paper jams..............................................................................................................................261  
290–292 paper jams..............................................................................................................................262  
451 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................262  
Troubleshooting.......................................................................................263  
Solving basic printer problems..............................................................................................................263  
Understanding printer messages..........................................................................................................263  
Adjusting color................................................................................................................................................263  
An error has occurred with the USB drive. Please remove and reinsert drive. ..............................................263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
11  
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] ..............................................................................................263  
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]................................................................. 264  
Change [paper source] to [custom string] ......................................................................................................264  
Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation].........................................................................264  
Change [paper source] to [paper size] [paper type].......................................................................................264  
Change [paper source] to [paper size] [paper type] load [orientation]..........................................................264  
Close [tray] door .............................................................................................................................................264  
Close front or side door ..................................................................................................................................265  
Disk corrupted ................................................................................................................................................265  
Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.....................................................................................................265  
Disk problem...................................................................................................................................................265  
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB............................................................................................................265  
Insert Tray [x]..................................................................................................................................................265  
Install Tray [x] .................................................................................................................................................265  
Load [src] with [custom type name] ...............................................................................................................266  
Load [src] with [custom string] .......................................................................................................................266  
Load [src] with [size] .......................................................................................................................................266  
Load [src] with [type] [size].............................................................................................................................266  
Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name]..............................................................................................266  
Load Manual Feeder with [custom string]......................................................................................................267  
Load Manual Feeder with [paper size] ...........................................................................................................267  
Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size].......................................................................................267  
Paper changes needed....................................................................................................................................267  
Remove paper from standard output bin.......................................................................................................267  
Replace separator pad....................................................................................................................................267  
Restore held jobs? ..........................................................................................................................................267  
Some held jobs were not restored .................................................................................................................268  
Supply needed to complete job......................................................................................................................268  
Tray [x] paper size unsupported .....................................................................................................................268  
Unsupported disk............................................................................................................................................268  
1565 Emulation error, load emulation option................................................................................................268  
30.xx Missing [color] cartridge and/or [color] imaging unit ...........................................................................268  
31.xx Missing or defective [color] cartridge ...................................................................................................268  
32.xx [color] cartridge part number unsupported by device..........................................................................268  
34 Incorrect paper size, open [src] .................................................................................................................269  
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature ............................................................................269  
36 Printer service required .............................................................................................................................269  
37 Insufficient memory to collate job.............................................................................................................269  
37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation ................................................................269  
37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted..................................................................................269  
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored ........................................................................270  
38 Memory full ...............................................................................................................................................270  
39 Complex page, some data may not have printed ......................................................................................270  
51 Defective flash detected............................................................................................................................270  
52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources..............................................................................270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
12  
53 Unformatted flash detected ......................................................................................................................270  
54 Serial option [x] error.................................................................................................................................270  
54 Standard network software error..............................................................................................................271  
54 Network [x] software error........................................................................................................................271  
55 Unsupported option in slot [x]...................................................................................................................271  
56 Parallel port [x] disabled............................................................................................................................271  
56 Serial port [x] disabled ...............................................................................................................................271  
56 Standard parallel port disabled..................................................................................................................272  
56 Standard USB port disabled.......................................................................................................................272  
56 USB port [x] disabled .................................................................................................................................272  
57 Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored ........................................................................272  
58 Input config error.......................................................................................................................................272  
58 Too many disks installed............................................................................................................................272  
58 Too many flash options installed ...............................................................................................................273  
58 Too many trays attached ...........................................................................................................................273  
61 Remove defective disk...............................................................................................................................273  
62 Disk full ......................................................................................................................................................273  
80.xx Fuser near life warning..........................................................................................................................273  
80.xx Fuser life warning ..................................................................................................................................274  
80.xx Replace fuser.........................................................................................................................................274  
80.xx Fuser missing.........................................................................................................................................274  
82.xx Replace waste toner bottle ...................................................................................................................274  
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly full ...............................................................................................................274  
83.xx Transfer module life warning ................................................................................................................274  
83.xx Transfer module missing .......................................................................................................................274  
83.xx Replace transfer module .......................................................................................................................274  
84 Defective [color] imaging unit....................................................................................................................275  
84.xx [color] imaging unit nearly low..............................................................................................................275  
84.xx [color] imaging unit low.........................................................................................................................275  
84.xx Replace [color] imaging unit and [color] cartridge................................................................................275  
84 Unsupported [color] imaging unit..............................................................................................................275  
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly low ...................................................................................................................275  
88.xx [color] cartridge low ..............................................................................................................................275  
88.2x Replace [color] cartridge.......................................................................................................................276  
Solving printing problems.....................................................................................................................276  
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print........................................................................................................276  
Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds...................................................................276  
Error message about reading USB drive appears ...........................................................................................276  
Print jobs do not print.....................................................................................................................................276  
Confidential and other held jobs do not print ................................................................................................277  
Print job takes longer than expected..............................................................................................................278  
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper..................................................................................278  
Incorrect characters print ...............................................................................................................................278  
Tray linking does not work..............................................................................................................................278  
Large jobs do not collate.................................................................................................................................279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
13  
Unexpected page breaks occur.......................................................................................................................279  
Solving copy problems..........................................................................................................................279  
Copier does not respond ................................................................................................................................279  
Scanner unit does not close............................................................................................................................280  
Poor copy quality............................................................................................................................................280  
Partial document or photo copies ..................................................................................................................281  
Solving scanner problems.....................................................................................................................282  
Checking an unresponsive scanner.................................................................................................................282  
Scan was not successful..................................................................................................................................282  
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer ..........................................................................................282  
Poor scanned image quality............................................................................................................................283  
Partial document or photo scans....................................................................................................................283  
Cannot scan from a computer ........................................................................................................................284  
Solving fax problems.............................................................................................................................284  
Fax and e-mail functions are not set up .........................................................................................................284  
Caller ID is not shown .....................................................................................................................................284  
Cannot send or receive a fax ..........................................................................................................................285  
Can send but not receive faxes.......................................................................................................................286  
Can receive but not send faxes.......................................................................................................................287  
Received fax has poor print quality ................................................................................................................287  
Solving home screen applications problems.........................................................................................288  
An application error has occurred ..................................................................................................................288  
Solving option problems........................................................................................................................289  
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed ......................................................................289  
Paper tray problems .......................................................................................................................................289  
Cannot detect flash memory card ..................................................................................................................290  
Cannot detect printer hard disk......................................................................................................................290  
Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly ........................................................................................290  
Internal print server does not operate correctly ............................................................................................290  
Memory card ..................................................................................................................................................291  
USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly .................................................................................291  
Solving paper feed problems.................................................................................................................291  
Paper frequently jams.....................................................................................................................................291  
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared ...........................................................................................291  
Jammed pages are not reprinted....................................................................................................................292  
Solving print quality problems..............................................................................................................292  
Characters have jagged or uneven edges .......................................................................................................292  
Clipped images................................................................................................................................................292  
Fine horizontal lines appear on color pages ...................................................................................................293  
Gray background.............................................................................................................................................293  
Incorrect margins............................................................................................................................................293  
Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line appears on prints .................................................. 294  
Paper curl........................................................................................................................................................295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
14  
Print irregularities...........................................................................................................................................295  
Print is too dark ..............................................................................................................................................296  
Print is too light...............................................................................................................................................297  
Printer is printing blank pages ........................................................................................................................298  
Repeating defects appear on a page ..............................................................................................................298  
Shadow images appear on prints ...................................................................................................................299  
Skewed print...................................................................................................................................................300  
Solid color pages.............................................................................................................................................300  
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints.....................................................................................................301  
Streaked vertical lines appear on prints .........................................................................................................301  
Toner fog or background shading appears on the page .................................................................................302  
Toner rubs off .................................................................................................................................................302  
Toner specks ...................................................................................................................................................302  
Transparency print quality is poor..................................................................................................................303  
Uneven print density ......................................................................................................................................303  
Solving color quality problems..............................................................................................................303  
FAQ about color printing ................................................................................................................................303  
Embedded Web Server does not open.................................................................................................306  
Check the network connection.......................................................................................................................306  
Check the address entered in the Web browser ............................................................................................307  
Temporarily disable Web proxy servers .........................................................................................................307  
Contacting customer support................................................................................................................307  
Notices.....................................................................................................308  
Product information..............................................................................................................................308  
Edition notice........................................................................................................................................308  
Power consumption..............................................................................................................................311  
Index........................................................................................................326  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety information  
15  
Safety information  
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.  
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.  
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.  
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media  
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a  
danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a  
lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local  
regulations.  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more  
trained personnel to lift it safely.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or  
printer damage:  
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.  
• Lift the printer off the optional drawer, and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same  
time.  
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.  
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce risk of fire, use only the telecommunications (RJ‑11) cord provided  
with this product or a UL Listed 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public  
switched telephone network.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system  
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.  
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific  
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not  
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not  
subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture  
and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly  
for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.  
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a professional service person.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug  
the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Safety information  
16  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or  
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning  
storm.  
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must  
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input  
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and  
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray  
separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.  
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Learning about the printer  
17  
Learning about the printer  
Finding information about the printer  
What are you looking for?  
Find it here  
Initial setup instructions:  
Setup documentation—The setup documentation came  
with the printer and is also available at  
http://support.lexmark.com.  
• Connecting the printer  
• Installing the printer software  
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:  
• Selecting and storing paper and specialty media  
• Loading paper  
User'sGuideandQuick Reference Guide—Theguidesmay  
be available on the Software and Documentation CD.  
For more information, visit  
http://support.lexmark.com.  
• Configuring printer settings  
• Viewing and printing documents and photos  
• Setting up and using the printer software  
• Configuring the printer on a network  
• Caring for and maintaining the printer  
• Troubleshooting and solving problems  
Instructions for:  
Networking Guide—Open the Software and  
Documentation CD, and then look for Printer and  
Software Documentation under the Pubs folder. From  
the list of publications, click the Networking Guide link.  
• Connecting the printer to an Ethernet network  
• Troubleshooting printer connection problems  
Help using the printer software  
WindowsorMac Help—Openaprintersoftware program  
or application, and then click Help.  
?
Click  
to view context‑sensitive information.  
Notes:  
• Help is automatically installed with the printer  
software.  
• The printer software is located in the printer  
program folder or on the desktop, depending on  
your operating system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Learning about the printer  
18  
What are you looking for?  
Find it here  
The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer  
support:  
Lexmark Support Web site—  
http://support.lexmark.com  
• Documentation  
• Driver downloads  
• Live chat support  
• E‑mail support  
• Voice support  
Note: Select your country or region, and then select  
your product to view the appropriate support site.  
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for  
your country or region can be found on the Support Web  
site or on the printed warranty that came with your  
printer.  
Record the following information (located on the store  
receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready  
when you contact customer support so that they may  
serve you faster:  
• Machine Type number  
• Serial number  
• Date purchased  
• Store where purchased  
Warranty information  
Warranty information varies by country or region:  
• In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited Warranty  
included with this printer, or at  
http://support.lexmark.com.  
• In other countries and regions—See the printed  
warranty that came with your printer.  
Selecting a location for the printer  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more  
trained personnel to lift it safely.  
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any  
options, then leave enough room for them too. It is important to:  
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee  
156 standard.  
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.  
• Keep the printer:  
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators  
– Free from direct sunlight, humidity extremes, or temperature fluctuations  
– Clean, dry, and free of dust  
• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Learning about the printer  
19  
5
4
3
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
348 mm (13.7 in.)  
609.6 mm (24 in.)  
100 mm (3.94 in.)  
100 mm (3.94 in.)  
285 mm (11.22 in.)  
Printer configurations  
Basic model  
Notes:  
• The printer stand is a cabinet that can be converted into a caster base.  
• If used with a printer stand, then the printer supports only one optional 550-sheet tray.  
• If used with a caster base, then the printer supports a maximum of three optional 550-sheet trays.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Learning about the printer  
20  
2
1
3
8
7
4
6
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
ADF input tray  
ADF exit bin  
Multipurpose feeder  
Standard 150‑sheet tray (Tray 1)  
Standard 250‑sheet tray (Tray 2)  
Standard exit bin  
Printer control panel  
Configured model  
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor‑mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must  
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high‑capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input  
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and  
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Learning about the printer  
21  
11  
9
10  
9
Optional 550‑sheet trays  
10 Caster base (converted from a printer stand)  
11 Printer stand  
Basic functions of the scanner  
The scanner provides copy, fax, and scan-to-network capability for large workgroups. You can:  
• Make quick copies, or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs.  
• Send a fax using the printer control panel.  
• Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.  
• Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, a flash drive, or an FTP destination.  
• Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF by way of FTP).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Learning about the printer  
22  
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass  
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents, including  
duplex pages.  
Use the scanner glass for single pages or book pages, small items  
(such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin  
media (such as magazine clippings).  
Using the ADF  
• Load documents into the ADF faceup, as indicated by the ADF paper icon.  
• Load up to 100 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray.  
• Scan sizes from 76.2 x 139.7 mm (3.0 x 5.5 in.) to 296.9 x 431.8 mm (11.69 x 17 in.).  
• Scan documents with mixed page sizes (Letter and Legal).  
• Scan media weights from 64 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb).  
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings)  
into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
Using the scanner glass  
• Unlock the scanner glass by sliding the button to the left.  
1
2
• Place documents facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Learning about the printer  
23  
• Scan or copy documents up to 296.9 x 431.8 mm (11.69 x 17 in.).  
• Copy books up to 25.4 mm (1 in.) thick.  
Understanding the printer control panel  
1
2
3
4
A
B
C
D
E
F
1
@ ! .  
2
3
G
H
I
J
K
U
L
M
N
X
O
4
5
8
0
6
P
Q
R
S
T
V
W
Y
Z
7
9
#
*
5
7
6
Item  
Description  
1
2
Display  
Shows the status of the printer, and allows printer setup and operation  
Indicator light  
• Off—The printer is off.  
• Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.  
• Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.  
• Blinking red—The printer requires operator intervention is needed.  
3
Sleep  
Enables Sleep Mode or Hibernate Mode  
The following are the statuses of the indicator light and the Sleep button:  
• Entering or waking from Sleep Mode—The indicator light is illuminated solid green, Sleep button  
is unilluminated.  
• Operating in Sleep Mode—The indicator light is illuminated solid green, Sleep button is  
illuminated solid amber.  
• Entering or waking from Hibernate Mode—The indicator light is illuminated solid green, Sleep  
button is illuminated blinking amber.  
• Operating in Hibernate Mode—The indicator light is unilluminated, Sleep button is blinking  
amber for 1/10 of a second, then go completely unilluminated for 1.9 seconds in pulsing pattern.  
The following actions wake the printer from Sleep Mode:  
• Touching the screen or any hard button presses.  
• Opening an input tray, cover, or door.  
• Sending a print job from the computer.  
• Performing a Power On Reset (POR) with the main power switch.  
4
5
6
Keypad  
Submit  
Lets you enter numbers, letter, or symbols  
Lets you submit changes made in the printer settings  
Stop/Cancel Stops all printer activity  
Note: A list of option is displayed once Stoppedappears on the display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Learning about the printer  
24  
Item  
7
Description  
Home  
Lets you navigate back to the home screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding the home screen  
25  
Understanding the home screen  
Understanding the home screen  
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the home screen  
buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to  
messages.  
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings,  
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.  
Touch  
Copy  
E-mail  
Fax  
To  
Access the Copy menus and make copies.  
Access the E-mail menus and send e‑mails.  
Access the Fax menus and send fax.  
Access the printer menus.  
Note: These menus are available only when the printer is in the Readystate.  
FTP  
Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server.  
Status message bar  
• Show the current printer status such as Readyor Busy.  
• Show printer conditions such as Toner Lowor Cartridge Low.  
• Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.  
Status/Supplies  
• Display a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue  
processing.  
• Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to clear it.  
USB or USB Thumbdrive View, select, print, scan, or e‑mail photos and documents from a flash drive.  
Note: This button appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or  
flash drive is connected to the printer.  
Bookmarks  
Held Jobs  
Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and file links.  
Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not from any  
other application.  
Display all current held jobs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding the home screen  
26  
Other buttons that may appear on the home screen:  
Touch  
To  
Search held jobs  
Search on any of the following items:  
• User name for held or confidential print jobs  
• Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs  
• Profile names  
• Bookmark container or print job names  
• USB container or print job names for supported file types  
Release Held Fax  
Lock Device  
Access the list of held faxes.  
Note: This button appears only when there are held faxes with a  
scheduled hold time previously set.  
Open a password entry screen. Enter the correct password to lock the  
printer control panel.  
Note: This button appears only when the printer is unlocked and  
password has been set.  
Unlock Device  
Cancel Jobs  
Open a password entry screen. Enter the correct password to unlock  
the printer control panel.  
Note: This button appears only when the printer is locked. The  
printer control panel buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while  
this appears.  
Open the Cancel Jobs screen. The Cancel Jobs screen shows three  
headings: Print, Fax, and Network.  
The following options are available under the Print, Fax, and Network  
headings:  
• Print job  
• Copy job  
• Fax profile  
• FTP  
• E-mail send  
Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can  
show only three jobs per screen. If more than three jobs exist in a  
column, then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs.  
Change Language  
LaunchtheChangeLanguagepop‑upwindowthatallowsyoutochange  
the primary language of the printer.  
Using the touch-screen buttons  
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings and  
administrative setup.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding the home screen  
27  
Sample touch screen  
Submit  
Touch  
To  
Submit  
Submit changes made in the printer settings.  
Sample Copy Print a sample copy.  
Right arrow  
Left arrow  
Home  
Scroll to the right.  
Scroll to the left.  
Return to the home screen.  
Right increase Select a higher value.  
Left decrease Select a lower value.  
Exit  
Exit from the current screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding the home screen  
28  
Touch  
To  
Tips  
Open a context-sensitive Help dialog on the touch screen.  
Other touch-screen buttons  
Touch  
To  
Accept  
Save a setting.  
Cancel  
• Cancel an action or a selection.  
• Exit a screen and lets you return to the previous screen without saving changes.  
Reset  
Reset values on the screen.  
Radio button  
Select or clear an item.  
Features  
Feature  
Description  
Menu trail line:  
A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows the  
path taken to arrive at the current menu.  
Menus > Settings > Copy Settings >  
Number of Copies  
Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.  
Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen. If you touch an  
underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies is  
set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the default  
setting.  
Attendance message alert  
If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red  
indicator light blinks.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding the home screen  
29  
Feature  
Description  
Warning  
If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting up and using the home screen applications  
30  
Setting up and using the home screen applications  
Notes:  
• Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings,  
administrative setup, and active embedded applications. Some applications are supported only on select printer  
models.  
• There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase.  
Finding the IP address of the printer  
Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.  
You can find the printer IP address:  
• From the top left corner of the printer home screen.  
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.  
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.  
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.  
Accessing the Embedded Web Server  
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even  
when you are not physically near the printer.  
1 Obtain the printer IP address:  
• From the printer control panel home screen  
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu  
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section  
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.  
2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.  
3 Press Enter.  
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.  
Showing or hiding icons on the home screen  
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.  
A list of basic printer functions appears.  
2 Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the printer home screen.  
Cleared check box items are hidden.  
3 Click Submit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Setting up and using the home screen applications  
31  
Exporting and importing a configuration using the Embedded  
Web Server  
You can export configuration settings into a text file that can then be imported and used to apply the settings to one  
or more additional printers.  
Exporting a configuration  
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings or Configuration.  
2 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.  
3 From Installed Solutions, click the name of the application you want to configure.  
4 Click Configure > Export.  
5 Follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file, and then enter a unique file name or  
use the default name.  
Note: If a JVM Out of Memoryerror occurs, then repeat the export until the configuration file is saved.  
Importing a configuration  
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings or Configuration.  
2 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.  
3 From Installed Solutions, click the name of the application you want to configure.  
4 Click Configure > Import.  
5 Browse to the saved configuration file, and then load or preview it.  
Note: If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the browser, and then click Apply.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting up and using the home screen applications  
32  
Activating the home screen applications  
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. To use these applications, activate and set up these  
applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information about accessing the Embedded Web Server, see  
“Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 30.  
For detailed information about configuring and using the home screen applications, visit the Lexmark Web site at  
http://support.lexmark.com.  
Setting up Forms and Favorites  
Icon  
Description  
The application helps you simplify and streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print  
frequently used online forms directly from the home screen.  
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the  
bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and  
firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that  
came with your operating system.  
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.  
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets  
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.  
2 Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Forms and Favorites.  
3 Define the bookmarks, and then customize the settings.  
4 Click Apply.  
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form  
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.  
Setting up Scan to Network  
Icon  
Description  
Theapplicationletsyoucapturea digital imageof ahard‑copydocumentand routeittoa sharednetwork  
folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder destinations.  
Notes:  
• The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where the  
destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a  
write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.  
• The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.  
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.  
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets  
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.  
2 Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Scan to Network.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting up and using the home screen applications  
33  
3 Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.  
4 Click Apply.  
To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the  
printer display.  
Setting up My MFP  
Icon  
Description  
The application lets you customize your touch‑screen settings and store those preferences in a flash  
drive. Each time you want to copy, fax, or scan, insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer. All  
your personal preferences are automatically uploaded, including job settings, home screen preferences,  
and address book.  
Note: The icon appears only when a flash drive with My MFP settings is inserted into the USB port of  
the printer.  
To set up My MFP, insert a flash drive into the USB port of the printer, and then follow the instructions on the printer  
display to run the setup wizard.  
To use My MFP, insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer when you want to copy, fax, or scan.  
Understanding WS‑Scan  
A WS‑Scan icon and its description  
Icon  
Description  
The Web Services‑Scan application lets you scan documents at the network printer, and then send the  
scanned image to your computer. WS‑Scan is a Microsoft application that is similar to Scan to Network,  
but has the capability of sending the scanned image to a Windows‑based application. To learn more  
about WS‑Scan, see the Microsoft documentation.  
Note: The icon appears on the printer home screen only when there is a computer registered with the  
network printer. The computer must have either Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista operating  
system installed.  
Setting up Remote Operator Panel  
This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control  
panel, even when you are not physically near the network printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer  
status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks you might normally do while standing  
at the network printer.  
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.  
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets  
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.  
2 Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Remote Operator Panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting up and using the home screen applications  
34  
3 Select the Enabled check box, and then customize the settings.  
4 Click Apply.  
To use the application, from the Embedded Web Server, click Applications > Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC  
Applet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
35  
Additional printer setup  
Installing internal options  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
You can customize your printer connectivity and memory capacity by adding optional cards.  
Available internal options  
• Memory cards  
– Printer memory  
– Flash memory  
– Fonts  
• Firmware cards  
– Bar Code  
– PrintCryptionTM  
• Printer hard disk  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Additional printer setup  
36  
Accessing the system board  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.  
1 Turn the screws clockwise to loosen them.  
2 Pull the cover forward to remove it.  
3 Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connectors.  
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.  
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
37  
1
3
2
1
2
3
Memory card connector  
Firmware and flash memory card connectors  
ISP connector  
4 Reattach the cover.  
Installing a memory card  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch  
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board.  
1 Access the system board.  
For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 36.  
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.  
2 Unpack the memory card.  
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
38  
3 On the system board, open the memory card connector latches.  
4 Align the notches on the memory card to the ridges on the connector.  
1
2
Notch  
Ridge  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
39  
5 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it clicks into place.  
1
2
6 Reattach the system board cover.  
Installing a flash memory or firmware card  
The systemboard has two connections for an optional flash memoryor firmware card. Only one of each may be installed,  
but the connectors are interchangeable.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch  
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
1 Access the system board.  
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.  
2 Unpack the card.  
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.  
3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board.  
2
1
1
2
Plastic pins  
Metal pins  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
40  
4 Push the card firmly into place.  
Notes:  
• The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board.  
• Be careful not to damage the connectors.  
5 Reattach the system board cover.  
Installing an Internal Solutions Port  
The system board supports one optional LexmarkTM Internal Solutions Port (ISP).  
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch  
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
1 Access the system board.  
For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 36.  
2 Remove the printer hard disk.  
For more information, see “Removing a printer hard disk” on page 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
41  
3 Remove the two screws.  
4 Unpack the ISP kit.  
1
4
2
3
1
2
3
4
ISP solution  
Screws for the ISP solution  
Screws for the plastic bracket  
Plastic bracket  
5 Use the provided screws to attach the plastic bracket to the ISP solution.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
42  
6 Use the provided screw to attach the ISP solution to the system board cage.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
43  
7 Connect the ISP solution interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.  
8 Firmly connect the ISP solution to the system board cage using two screws.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
44  
Installing a printer hard disk  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch  
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
1 Access the system board.  
for more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 36  
2 Remove the metal bracket from the printer hard disk using a flathead screwdriver.  
3 Connect the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP board.  
4 Reattach the system board cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
45  
Removing a printer hard disk  
The printer hard disk is preinstalled in this device.  
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.  
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch  
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
1 Access the system board.  
For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 36.  
2 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board, leaving the cable attached to the printer hard  
disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling  
the cable out.  
3 Remove the screws while holding the printer hard disk in place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
46  
4 Remove the printer hard disk.  
5 Reattach the system board cover.  
Installing optional trays  
Order of installation  
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must  
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input  
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and  
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.  
Install the printer and any options you have purchased in the following order:  
• Printer stand  
• Optional 550‑sheet trays  
• Printer  
For more information on converting a printer stand to caster base, and installing a printer stand, caster base or optional  
550-sheet tray, see the documentation that came with the printer option.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Additional printer setup  
47  
Installing a printer stand and optional tray  
Note: If used with a printer stand, then the printer supports only one optional 550‑sheet tray.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more  
trained personnel to lift it safely.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
Note: This task requires a screwdriver.  
1 Unpack the optional tray and printer stand, and then remove all packing material.  
1
2
4
3
1
2
3
4
Optional 550-sheet tray  
Printer stand  
Brackets and screws  
Thumbscrews  
2 Turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices  
attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
48  
3 Attach the thumbscrews on top of the printer stand.  
4 Align the optional tray to the printer stand, then lower the printer to the tray.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
49  
5 Lock the standard and optional trays together using the brackets that came with the optional tray.  
a Open the standard 250- and optional 550‑sheet tray.  
b Remove the screw from the 250‑sheet tray.  
c Place a bracket over the screw hole and secure it with the screw.  
d Close the trays.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
50  
6 Lock the optional 550‑sheet tray to the printer stand.  
a Open the optional 550‑sheet tray and remove the screw.  
b Open the printer stand.  
c Place a bracket over the screw hole and secure it with the screw.  
d Close the optional tray and printer stand.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
51  
7 Plug in the electrical connections between trays.  
8 Attach brackets to the back of the printer, optional tray, and printer stand.  
1
2
1
2
Bracket to lock optional tray to printer  
Bracket to lock optional tray to printer stand  
a Insert brackets on the slots located at the back of the optional tray and printer stand.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
52  
b Secure the brackets with screws.  
c Insert brackets on the slots located at the back of the printer and optional tray.  
d Secure the brackets with screws.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
53  
9 Insert the bases on the slots at the sides of the printer stand and secure them with screws.  
10 Turn the printer back on.  
11 Set the printer software to recognize the optional input source.  
For more information, see “Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 62.  
Installing 550‑sheet trays  
Notes:  
• The printer supports a maximum of three optional 550‑sheet trays.  
• When installing three optional 550‑sheet trays, use a printer stand converted into a caster base.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more  
trained personnel to lift it safely.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
Note: This task requires a screwdriver.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
54  
1 Unpack the optional tray and the printer stand, and then remove all packing material.  
1
2
4
3
1
2
3
4
Optional 550-sheet tray  
Printer stand  
Brackets and screws  
Thumbscrews  
2 Turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices  
attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
3 Convert the printer stand into a caster base.  
a Remove the four screws inside the printer stand.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
55  
b Lift the upper portion of the printer stand, leaving the base.  
4 Attach the thumbscrews on the caster base.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
56  
5 Align the trays to the caster base, then lower the printer to the trays.  
6 Lock the standard and optional trays together using the brackets that came with the optional tray.  
a Open the standard 250- and optional 550‑sheet tray.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
57  
b Remove the screw from the 250‑sheet tray.  
c Place a bracket over the screw hole and secure it with the screw.  
d Close the trays.  
7 Lock the optional 550‑sheet trays together using the screws that came with the trays.  
a Remove the upper optional 550-sheet tray drawer. Leave the lower optional trays open.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
58  
b Reach into the lower optional tray and insert a screw, pushing it upward to the optional tray above it.  
1
2
8 Plug in the electrical connections between trays.  
9 Attach brackets to the back of the printer and optional trays.  
a Insert brackets on the slots located at the back of the optional trays.  
b Secure the brackets with screws.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
59  
c Insert brackets on the slots located at the back of the printer and optional tray.  
d Secure the brackets with screws.  
10 Insert the bases on the slots at the sides of the caster base and secure them with screws.  
11 Turn the printer back on.  
12 Set the printer software to recognize the optional input source.  
For more information, see “Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 62.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
60  
Attaching cables  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product  
or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a  
lightning storm.  
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable.  
Be sure to match the following:  
• The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer  
• The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port  
2
1
1
2
USB port  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area shown  
while actively printing. A loss of data or a malfunction can occur.  
Ethernet port  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
61  
Verifying printer setup  
Once all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up  
correctly by printing the following:  
• Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options  
appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly.  
Remove the option and install it again.  
• Network setup page—If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network, print a network setup page  
to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing  
configuration.  
Printing a menu settings page  
From the home screen, navigate to:  
> Reports > Menu Settings Page  
Printing a network setup page  
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page  
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.  
1 From the home screen, navigate to:  
> Reports > Network Setup Page  
2 Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.  
Ifthe status isNot Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.  
Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.  
Setting up the printer software  
Installing the printer software  
Notes:  
• If you installed the printer software on the computer before but need to reinstall the software, then uninstall  
the current software first.  
• Close all open software programs before installing the printer software.  
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.  
• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.  
• From our Web site:  
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:  
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system  
2 Double‑click the software installer package.  
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Additional printer setup  
62  
If you are using a Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:  
In Windows 8  
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:  
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe> OK.  
In Windows 7 or earlier  
a Click  
or click Start, and then click Run.  
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.  
c Press Enter, or click OK.  
In Macintosh  
Click the CD icon on the desktop.  
Note: Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive.  
3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
Updating available options in the printer driver  
When any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make  
them available for use.  
For Windows users  
1 Open the printers folder.  
In Windows 8  
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:  
Apps list > Run > type control printers> OK  
In Windows 7 or earlier  
a Click  
or click Start, and then click Run.  
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.  
c Press Enter, or click OK.  
2 Depending on your device, do either of the following:  
• Press and hold the printer you want to update.  
• Right‑click the printer you want to update.  
3 From the menu that appears, do either of the following:  
• For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.  
• For earlier versions, select Properties.  
4 Click the Configuration tab.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
63  
5 Do either of the following:  
• Click Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.  
• Under Configuration Options, manually add any installed hardware options.  
6 Click Apply.  
For Macintosh users  
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:  
• System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver  
• System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver  
2 Add any installed hardware options, and then click OK.  
Setting up wireless printing  
Note: A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wireless Encryption Protocol (WEP)  
and Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) are types of security used on a network.  
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network  
Notes:  
• Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.  
• Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software.  
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:  
• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.  
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.  
• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.  
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are  
not sure which channel to select.  
• Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:  
– WEP key  
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key  
currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.  
– WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase  
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set  
for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the  
network.  
– 802.1X–RADIUS  
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:  
• Authentication type  
• Inner authentication type  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Additional printer setup  
64  
• 802.1X user name and password  
• Certificates  
– No security  
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.  
Note: Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended.  
Notes:  
– If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility  
of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the  
security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point or contact  
your system support person.  
– To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that  
came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your  
system support person.  
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)  
Before installing the printer on a wireless network, make sure:  
• Your wireless network is set up and is working properly.  
• The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer.  
1 Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.  
1
2
Note: Make sure the printer and the computer are fully on and ready.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the computer screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
65  
2 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.  
• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.  
• From our Web site:  
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:  
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system  
3 Double‑click the software installer package.  
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.  
If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the  
following:  
In Windows 8  
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:  
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe> OK  
In Windows 7 or earlier  
a Click  
or click Start, and then click Run.  
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.  
c Press Enter or click OK.  
Note: Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive.  
4 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
5 Select Wireless connection when asked to choose a connection type.  
6 From the Wireless Configuration dialog, select Guided Setup (Recommended).  
Note: Choose Advanced Setup only if you want to customize your installation.  
7 Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer.  
Note: After the printer is configured, the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so  
you can print wirelessly.  
8 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
Note: For more information on allowing other computers on the network to use the wireless printer, see the  
Networking Guide.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
66  
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)  
Note: Make sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable when installing the printer on a wireless network.  
Prepare to configure the printer  
1 Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.  
1
2
2 Locate the printer MAC address.  
a From the printer control panel, navigate to:  
> Reports >  
> Network Setup Page >  
or  
> Reports > Network Setup Page  
b In the Standard Network Card section, look for UAA (MAC).  
Note: You will need this information later.  
Enter the printer information  
1 Access the AirPort options:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later  
From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:  
• System Preferences > Network > Wi‑Fi  
• System Preferences > Network > AirPort  
In Mac OS X version 10.4  
From the Finder, navigate to:  
Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort  
2 From the Network Name pop‑up menu, select print server [yyyyyy], where the y’s are the last six digits of the MAC  
address located on the MAC address sheet.  
3 Open a Web browser.  
4 From the Bookmarks menu, select Show or Show All Bookmarks.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
67  
5 Under COLLECTIONS, select Bonjour or Rendezvous, and then double‑click the printer name.  
Note: The application referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10.2 is now called Bonjour by Apple Inc.  
6 From the Embedded Web Server, navigate to the location of the wireless settings information.  
Configure the printer for wireless access  
1 Type the network name (SSID) in the appropriate field.  
2 Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode setting if you are using an access point (wireless router).  
3 Select the type of security you want to use to protect the wireless network.  
4 Enter the security information necessary for the printer to connect to the wireless network.  
5 Click Submit.  
6 Open the AirPort application on the computer:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later  
From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:  
• System Preferences > Network > Wi‑Fi  
• System Preferences > Network > AirPort  
In Mac OS X version 10.4  
From the Finder, navigate to:  
Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort  
7 From the Network pop‑up menu, select the name of the wireless network.  
Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly  
To print on a network printer, each Macintosh user must install a custom printer driver file and create a print queue in  
the Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.  
1 Install a printer driver file on the computer:  
a Obtain a copy of the software installer package.  
• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.  
• From our Web site:  
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:  
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system  
b Double‑click the installer package for the printer.  
c Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
d Select a destination, and then click Continue.  
e From the Easy Install screen, click Install.  
f Type the user password, and then click OK.  
All necessary applications are installed in the computer.  
g Click Close when the installation is complete.  
2 Add the printer:  
a For IP printing:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
68  
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later  
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:  
• System Preferences > Print & Scan  
• System Preferences > Print & Fax  
2 Click +.  
3 If necessary, click Add Printer or Scanner or Add Other Printer or Scanner.  
4 Click the IP tab.  
5 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field, and then click Add.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4  
1 From the Finder, navigate to:  
Applications > Utilities  
2 Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.  
3 From the Printer List, choose Add, and then click IP Printer.  
4 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field, and then click Add.  
b For AppleTalk printing:  
Notes:  
• Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.  
• This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or earlier.  
In Mac OS X version 10.5  
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:  
System Preferences > Print & Fax  
2 Click +, and then navigate to:  
AppleTalk > select the printer from the list > Add  
In Mac OS X version 10.4  
1 From the Finder, navigate to:  
Applications > Utilities  
2 Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.  
3 From the Printer List, click Add.  
4 Click Default Browser tab > More Printers.  
5 From the first pop‑up menu, select AppleTalk.  
6 From the second pop‑up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.  
7 Select the printer from the list, and then click Add.  
Installing the printer on an Ethernet network  
Note: Make sure you have completed the initial setup of the printer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
69  
For Windows users  
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.  
• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.  
• From our Web site:  
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:  
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system  
2 Double‑click the software installer package.  
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.  
If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the  
following:  
In Windows 8  
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:  
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe> OK  
In Windows 7 or earlier  
a Click  
or click Start, and then click Run.  
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.  
c Press Enter or click OK.  
Note: Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive.  
3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
Note: To configure the printer using a static IP address, IPv6, or scripts, select Advanced Options >  
Administrator Tools.  
4 Select Ethernet connection, and then click Continue.  
5 Attach the Ethernet cable when instructed to do so.  
6 Select the printer from the list, and then click Continue.  
Note: If the configured printer does not appear in the list, then click Modify Search.  
7 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
For Macintosh users  
1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.  
2 Obtain the printer IP address either:  
• From the printer control panel  
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu  
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section  
Note: You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.  
3 Install the printer driver on the computer.  
a Double‑click the installer package for the printer.  
b Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
70  
c Select a destination, and then click Continue.  
d From the Easy Install screen, click Install.  
e Type the user password, and then click OK.  
All the necessary applications are installed on the computer.  
f Click Close when the installation is complete.  
4 Add the printer.  
• For IP printing:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later  
a From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:  
– System Preferences > Print & Scan  
– System Preferences > Print & Fax  
b Click +.  
c If necessary, click Add Printer or Scanner or Add Other Printer or Scanner.  
d Click the IP tab.  
e Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier  
a From the Finder, navigate to:  
Applications > Utilities  
b Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.  
c From the printer list, click Add, and then click IP Printer.  
d Type the scanner IP address in the address field, and then click Add.  
• For AppleTalk printing:  
Notes:  
– Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.  
– This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or earlier.  
In Mac OS X version 10.5  
a From the Apple menu, navigate to:  
System Preferences > Print & Fax  
b Click +, and then navigate to:  
AppleTalk > select your printer > Add  
In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier  
a From the Finder, navigate to:  
Applications > Utilities  
b Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.  
c From the printer list, click Add.  
d Click Default Browser tab > More Printers.  
e From the first pop‑up menu, select AppleTalk.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
71  
f From the second pop‑up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.  
g Select the device from the list, and then click Add.  
Note: If the scanner does not show up in the list, then you may need to add it using the IP address. For more  
information, contact your system support person.  
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal  
Solutions Port  
When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the printer, the printer configurations on computers  
that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a new IP address. All computers that access  
the printer must be updated with this new IP address.  
Notes:  
• If the printer has a static IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.  
• If the computers are configured to use the network name, instead of an IP address, then you do not need to  
make any changes to your computer configurations.  
• If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection, then make sure  
the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly. If  
the printer is connected to the Ethernet network, then the wireless configuration completes, but the wireless  
ISP is inactive. To activate the wireless ISP, disconnect the printer from the Ethernet network, turn off the  
printer, and then turn it back on.  
• Only one network connection is active at a time. To switch between Ethernet and wireless connection types,  
turn off the printer, connect the cable (to switch to an Ethernet connection) or disconnect the cable (to switch  
to a wireless connection), and then turn the printer back on.  
For Windows users  
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.  
Notes:  
• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers  
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.  
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.  
2 Open the printers folder.  
In Windows 8  
From the Search charm, type Runand then navigate to:  
Apps list > Run > type control printers> OK  
In Windows 7 or earlier  
a Click  
, or click Start and then click Run.  
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.  
c Press Enter, or click OK.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
72  
3 To select the printer that has changed, do either of the following:  
• Press and hold the printer, and then select Printer properties.  
• Right‑click the printer, and then select Printer properties (Windows 7 or later) or Properties (earlier versions).  
Note: If there is more than one copy of the printer, then update all of them with the new IP address.  
4 Click the Ports tab.  
5 Select the port from the list, and then click Configure Port.  
6 Type the new IP address in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field.  
7 Click OK > Close.  
For Macintosh users  
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.  
Notes:  
• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers  
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.  
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.  
2 Add the printer.  
• For IP printing:  
a From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:  
– System Preferences > Print & Scan  
– System Preferences > Print & Fax  
b Click +.  
c Click the IP tab.  
d Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.  
• For AppleTalk printing:  
Notes:  
– Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.  
– This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5.  
a From the Apple menu, navigate to:  
System Preferences > Print & Fax  
b Click +, and then navigate to:  
AppleTalk > select the printer > Add  
Setting up serial printing  
Use serial printing to print when the computer is far from the printer or to print at a reduced speed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
73  
After installing the serial or communication (COM) port, configure the printer and the computer. Make sure you have  
connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer.  
1 Set the parameters in the printer.  
a From the printer control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.  
b Locate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.  
c Save the modified settings, and then print a menu settings page.  
2 Install the printer driver.  
a Obtain a copy of the software installer package.  
• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer  
• From our Web site:  
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:  
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system  
b Double‑click the software installer package.  
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.  
If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the  
following:  
In Windows 8  
From the Search charm type run, and then navigate to:  
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe> OK  
In Windows 7 or earlier  
1 Click  
or click Start, and then click Run.  
2 In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.  
3 Press Enter or click OK.  
Note: Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive.  
c Click Install.  
d Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
e Select Advanced, and then click Continue.  
f From the Configure Printer Connection dialog, select a port.  
g If the port is not in the list, then click Refresh, or navigate to:  
Add port > select a port type > enter the necessary information > OK  
h Click Continue > Finish.  
3 Set the COM port parameters.  
After installing the printer driver, set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver.  
Note: Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the printer.  
a Open Device Manager.  
In Windows 8  
From the Search charm, type runand then navigate to:  
Apps list > Run > type devmgmt.msc> OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
74  
In Windows 7 or earlier  
1 Click  
or click Start, and then click Run.  
2 In the Start Search or Run dialog, type devmgmt.msc.  
3 Press Enter or click OK.  
b Double‑click Ports (COM & LPT) to expand the list of available ports.  
c Do either of the following:  
• Press and hold the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).  
• Right‑click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).  
d From the menu that appears, select Properties.  
e On the Port Settings tab, set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters set in the printer.  
Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the printer settings.  
f Click OK, and then close all the dialogs.  
g Print a test page to verify printer installation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact  
75  
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact  
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact  
on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide  
collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:  
• The Notices chapter  
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment  
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle  
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter  
outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.  
Saving paper and toner  
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly  
reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both  
sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.  
For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see “Using Eco‑Mode” on  
page 76.  
Using recycled paper  
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for  
use in laser/LED printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled  
paper and other office papers” on page 91.  
Conserving supplies  
Use both sides of the paper  
If your printer model supports duplex printing, you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper  
by selecting 2‑sided printing from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar.  
Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper  
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by  
selecting a setting from the Multipage printing (N‑Up) section of the Print dialog screen.  
Check your first draft for accuracy  
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:  
• Use the preview feature, which you can select from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar to see how the  
document will look like before you print it.  
• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact  
76  
Avoid paper jams  
Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 252.  
Print in black and white  
To print all text and graphics using only the black toner cartridge, set the printer to Black Only. For more information,  
see “Printing in black and white” on page 96.  
Use Max Speed or Max Yield settings  
The Max Speed and Max Yield settings let you choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield. Max Speed  
is the factory default setting. For more information, see “Using Max Speed and Max Yield” on page 103.  
Saving energy  
Using Eco‑Mode  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode > select a setting > Submit.  
Choose  
Off  
To  
Use factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode. This setting supports the performance  
specifications of your printer.  
Energy  
Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.  
• Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the first  
page is printed.  
• The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.  
• When the printer enters Sleep mode, the printer control panel display and the standard exit bin lights  
are turned off.  
• If scanning is supported, the scanner lamps are activated only when a scan job is started.  
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy mode and Paper mode.  
Paper  
• Enable the automatic duplex feature.  
• Turn off print log features.  
Reducing printer noise  
To select a Quiet Mode setting using the Embedded Web Server:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact  
77  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting > Submit.  
Choose  
To  
Off  
Use factory default settings. This setting supports the  
performance specifications of your printer.  
Note: Selecting Photo from the driver may disable Quiet  
Mode and provide better print quality and full speed  
printing.  
On  
Reduce printer noise.  
• Print jobs will process at a reduced speed.  
• Printer engine motors do not start until a document is  
ready to print. There will be a short delay before the first  
page is printed.  
• If your printer has faxing capability, fax sounds are  
reduced or disabled, including those made by the fax  
speaker and ringer. The fax is placed in standby mode.  
• The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned  
off.  
• The printer will ignore the Advance Start command.  
Adjusting Sleep Mode  
To save energy, you can decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Sleep Mode.  
Available settings range from 1–240 minutes. The factory default setting is 5 minutes.  
Using the Embedded Web Server  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.  
3 In the Sleep Mode field, enter the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode.  
4 Click Submit.  
Using the printer control panel  
1 From the home screen, navigate to:  
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode  
2 In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode.  
3 Touch  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact  
78  
Using Hibernate Mode  
Hibernate is an ultra‑low power operating mode. When operating in Hibernate mode, the printer is essentially off, and  
all other systems and devices are powered down safely.  
Note: The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled.  
Using the Embedded Web Server  
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Sleep Button Settings.  
3 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop‑down, select Hibernate.  
4 Click Submit.  
Using the printer control panel  
1 From the home screen, navigate to:  
> Settings > General Settings > Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button > Hibernate  
2 Touch Submit.  
Adjusting the brightness of the display  
To save energy, or if you have trouble reading your display, then adjust the brightness of the display.  
Available settings range from 20–100. The factory default setting is 100.  
Using the Embedded Web Server  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings > General Settings.  
3 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.  
4 Click Submit.  
Using the printer control panel  
1 From the home screen, navigate to:  
> Settings > General Settings  
2 Touch the arrows until Screen Brightnessappears, and then select a setting.  
3 Touch Submit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact  
79  
Setting the standard exit bin light  
To save energy, you can dim or turn off the output lighting for the standard exit bin.  
Available settings are Off, Dim, and Bright.  
The factory default setting for Normal/Standby Mode is Bright.  
When Eco‑Mode is set to Energy or Energy/Paper, then the light setting is Dim.  
When in Sleep Mode, then the light is off.  
Using the Embedded Web Server  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Output Lighting.  
3 From the Normal/Standby Mode list, select the light setting for the standard exit bin when in Ready or Standby  
mode.  
4 Click Submit.  
Using the printer control panel  
1 From the home screen, navigate to:  
> Settings > General Settings > Output Lighting  
2 Touch the arrow button next to Normal/Standby Modeto select the light settings for the standard exit bin  
when in Ready or Standby Mode.  
3 Touch Submit.  
Recycling  
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information,  
see:  
• The Notices chapter  
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment  
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle  
Recycling Lexmark products  
To return Lexmark products for recycling:  
1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.  
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact  
80  
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local  
recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.  
Recycling Lexmark packaging  
Lexmark continually strives tominimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported  
in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These  
efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.  
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.  
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your  
area.  
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the  
box.  
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling  
Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both  
easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent  
of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return  
the cartridges are also recycled.  
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and  
use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:  
1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.  
2 From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.  
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Loading paper and specialty media  
81  
Loading paper and specialty media  
Setting the paper size and type  
The Paper Size setting is automatically sensed according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the  
multipurpose feeder. The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the Paper Size  
menu. The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper.  
From the home screen navigate to:  
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type > Submit  
Configuring Universal paper settings  
The Universal Paper Size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer  
menus. Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper  
Size menu. Then, specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper:  
• Units of Measure  
• Portrait Width  
• Portrait Height  
Note: The maximum setting for Portrait Width and Portrait Height is 3–48 inches.  
1 From the home screen, navigate to:  
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure  
2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height > select the width or height > Submit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Loading paper and specialty media  
82  
Loading the standard or optional 550‑sheet tray  
The printer has a standard 150‑sheet (Tray 1) and 250‑sheet tray (Tray 2), and it may have one or more optional  
550‑sheet trays. All 550‑sheet trays support the same paper sizes and types.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray  
separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.  
1 Pull the tray out.  
Notice the size indicators at the bottom of the tray. Use these indicators to help position the guides.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Loading paper and specialty media  
83  
2 Make sure to release the width guide lock at the rear of the tray. Squeeze and then slide the width guide to the  
correct position for the paper size you are loading.  
2
1
3
Note: Always use the width guide lock at the rear of the tray to prevent the margins from being knocked out of  
adjustment.  
3 Squeeze and then slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.  
4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level  
surface.  
5 Load the paper stack with the recommended print side faceup.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
84  
Notes:  
• If the paper is longer than A4, then load it in short‑edge orientation.  
• If the paper is shorter than A4, then load it in long‑edge orientation.  
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line located on the edge of the paper tray. Overloading the  
tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage.  
Long‑edge orientation  
Short‑edge orientation  
6 Adjust both the width and length guides to lightly touch the edge of the paper stack. Make sure the paper fits loosely  
in the tray, lies flat, and is not bent or wrinkled.  
7 Turn the wheel clockwise to set the paper size.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
85  
8 Lock the width guide.  
9 Insert the tray.  
10 From the printer control panel, verify the Paper Size and Paper Type for the tray based on the paper you loaded.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
86  
Loading the multipurpose feeder  
The multipurpose feeder can hold several sizes and types of print media, such as transparencies, labels, card stock, and  
envelopes. It can be used for single-page or manual printing, or as an additional tray.  
The multipurpose feeder can hold approximately:  
• 50 sheets of 75‑g/m2 (20‑lb) paper  
• 10 envelopes  
• 20 transparencies  
Note: Do not add or remove paper or specialty media when the printer is printing from the multipurpose feeder or  
when the printer control panel indicator light is blinking. Doing so may cause a jam.  
1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door.  
2 Gently pull the extension until it is fully extended.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Loading paper and specialty media  
87  
3 Flex the sheets of paper or specialty media back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease them. Straighten  
the edges on a level surface.  
Paper  
Envelopes  
Transparencies  
Note: Avoid scratching or touching the print side.  
4 Load the paper or specialty media. Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.  
Notes:  
• Load A3‑, A6‑, 11x17, JIS B4‑, Statement‑ and legal‑size media in short‑edge orientation.  
• Load A4‑, A5‑, Exec‑, JIS B5‑ and letter‑size media in long‑edge orientation.  
• Load envelopes flap side up in short‑edge orientation.  
• Do not exceed the maximum amount of media that the multipurpose feeder can hold.  
• Load only one size and type of paper at a time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
88  
Long‑edge orientation  
Short‑edge orientation  
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or  
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.  
5 Adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the stack. Make sure the paper or specialty media fits loosely in  
the multipurpose feeder, lies flat, and is not bent or wrinkled.  
6 From the printer control panel, set the Paper Size and Paper Type for the multipurpose feeder (MP Feeder Size and  
MP Feeder Type) based on the paper or specialty media loaded.  
Linking and unlinking trays  
Linking trays  
Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or for printing multiple copies. When one linked tray is empty, paper feeds  
from the next linked tray. When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays, the trays are  
automatically linked. The Paper Size setting is automatically sensed according to the position of the paper guides in  
each tray except Tray 1 and the multipurpose feeder. The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set  
manually from the Paper Size menu. The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays from the Paper Type menu. The  
Paper Type menu and the Paper Size menu are both available from the Paper Size/Type menu.  
Unlinking trays  
Note: Trays that do not have the same settings as any other tray are not linked.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Loading paper and specialty media  
89  
Change one of the following tray settings:  
• Paper Type  
Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics. If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked  
trays, assign a different Paper Type name to the tray, such as Custom Type [x], or define your own custom name.  
• Paper Size  
Load a different paper size to automatically change the Paper Size setting for a tray. Paper Size settings for the  
multipurpose feeder are not automatic; they must be set manually from the Paper Size menu.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper  
loaded in a tray. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type. Prints may not be  
properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected.  
Creating a custom name for a paper type  
If the printer is on a network, you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type [x] for  
each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer.  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Name > type a name > Submit.  
Note: This custom name will replace the Custom Type [x] name under the Custom Types and Paper Size and  
Type menus.  
3 Click Custom Types > select a paper type > Submit.  
Assigning a custom paper type name  
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.  
From the home screen, navigate to:  
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a custom paper type name > select a tray > Submit  
Configuring a custom name  
If the printer is on a network, then you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type [x]  
for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer.  
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types > select the custom name you want to configure > select a paper or  
specialty media type > Submit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
90  
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
Paper guidelines  
Paper characteristics  
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these factors before printing on them:  
Weight  
The printer trays and multipurpose feeder can automatically feed paper weights between 60–176 g/m2 (16–47‑lb) grain  
long paper. The 2100‑sheet tray can automatically feed paper weights up to 60–135 g/m2 (16–36‑lb) grain long paper.  
Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, and may cause jams.  
Note: Two‑sided printing is supported for 60–176 g/m2 (16–47‑lb) paper.  
Curl  
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after  
the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid,  
cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding  
problems.  
Smoothness  
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too  
smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points;  
smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.  
Moisture content  
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.  
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that  
can degrade its performance.  
Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing. Extend  
the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment. Thick  
paper may also require a longer conditioning period.  
Grain direction  
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of  
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.  
For 60–176 g/m2 (16–47‑lb) paper, grain long paper is recommended.  
Fiber content  
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the  
paperwith a high degree ofstability, resulting in fewer paper feeding problemsand better print quality. Paper containing  
fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
91  
Unacceptable paper  
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:  
• Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless  
copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper  
• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer  
• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser  
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±2.3 mm (±0.9 in.),  
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms  
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.  
• Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers  
• Rough‑edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers  
• Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)  
• Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)  
• Multiple‑part forms or documents  
Selecting paper  
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.  
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:  
• Always use new, undamaged paper.  
• Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on  
the paper package.  
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.  
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.  
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.  
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead  
• Use grain long for 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) paper.  
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.  
• Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.  
• Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these  
requirements; latex inks might not.  
• Print samples on preprinted forms and letterheads considered for use before buying large quantities. This  
determines whether or not the ink in the preprinted form or letterhead will affect print quality.  
• When in doubt, contact your paper supplier.  
Using recycled paper and other office papers  
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for  
use in laser and LED (electrophotographic) printers. In 1998, Lexmark presented to the US government a study  
demonstrating that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non-recycled paper. However, no  
blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
92  
Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper (20–100% post-consumer waste) and a variety of test paper  
from around the world, using chamber tests for different temperature and humidity conditions. Lexmark has found no  
reason to discourage the use of today's recycled office papers, but generally the following property guidelines apply  
to recycled paper.  
• Low moisture content (4–5%)  
• Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)  
Note: Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser and LED papers, 50–90 Sheffield units) and  
much rougher papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered to work  
very well in laser and LED printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your  
paper supplier.  
• Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)  
• Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed  
Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m2 [16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and paper  
that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for  
reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser or LED (electrophotographic) printing, consult your  
paper supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still  
cause paper feeding problems in any laser or LED printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively under normal  
printing conditions).  
Storing paper  
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:  
• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent. Most  
label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative humidity  
between 40 and 60 percent.  
• Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.  
• Store individual packages on a flat surface.  
• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.  
• Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and wrapper  
help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
93  
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights  
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper input sources and the types of paper they  
support.  
Note: To use a paper size that is unlisted, configure a Universal Paper Size.  
Supported paper sizes  
150‑  
sheet  
tray  
250‑  
sheet  
tray  
520‑  
sheet  
tray  
Paper size and  
dimension  
MP  
Feeder  
Manual  
Paper  
Manual  
Envelope  
Scanner  
glass  
Duplex  
ADF  
A4  
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
210 x 297 mm  
(8.27 x 11.7 in.)  
A5  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
1
1
1
1
1
148 x 210 mm  
(5.83 x 8.27 in.)  
A6  
X
X
X
X
105 x 148 mm  
(4.13 x 5.83 in.)  
JIS B5  
1
182 x 257 mm  
(7.17 x 10.1 in.)  
Letter  
2
2
216 x 279 mm  
(8.5 x 11 in.)  
Legal  
2
2
2
2
1
216 x 356 mm  
(8.5 x 14 in.)  
Executive  
X
X
X
184 x 267 mm  
(7.25 x 10.5 in.)  
JIS B4  
257 x 364 mm  
(10.12 x 14.33 in.)  
A3  
297 x 420 mm  
(11.69 x 16.54 in.)  
1 Paper size is supported if set to metric.  
2 Paper size is supported if set to US.  
3 Source supports size without size sensing.  
4 Source supports size with size sensing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
94  
150‑  
sheet  
tray  
250‑  
sheet  
tray  
520‑  
sheet  
tray  
Paper size and  
dimension  
MP  
Feeder  
Manual  
Paper  
Manual  
Envelope  
Scanner  
glass  
Duplex  
ADF  
11x17  
X
X
X
X
X
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
279 x 432 mm  
(11 x 17 in.)  
Oficio (México)  
X
X
X
X
X
X
4
1
2
4
4
1
2
4
216 x 340 mm  
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)  
Folio  
X
X
216 x 330 mm  
(8.5 x 13 in.)  
Statement  
X
X
140 x 216 mm  
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)  
Universal  
X
X
64‑297 mm x 148‑4  
32 mm  
(2.52‑11.69 x 5.83‑  
17.01 in.)  
7 3/4 Envelope  
(Monarch)  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3
98 x 191 mm  
(3.875 x 7.5 in.)  
9 Envelope  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3
3
3
3
3
98 x 226 mm  
(3.875 x 8.9 in.)  
Com 10 Envelope  
105 x 241 mm  
(4.12 x 9.5 in.)  
DL Envelope  
110 x 220 mm  
(4.33 x 8.66 in.)  
C5 Envelope  
162 x 229 mm  
(6.38 x 9.01 in.)  
B5 Envelope  
176 x 250 mm  
(6.93 x 9.84 in.)  
1 Paper size is supported if set to metric.  
2 Paper size is supported if set to US.  
3 Source supports size without size sensing.  
4 Source supports size with size sensing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
95  
150‑  
sheet  
tray  
250‑  
sheet  
tray  
520‑  
sheet  
tray  
Paper size and  
dimension  
MP  
Feeder  
Manual  
Paper  
Manual  
Envelope  
Scanner  
glass  
Duplex  
X
ADF  
X
Other Envelope  
X
X
X
X
X
3
86 x 165 mm to  
216 x 356 mm  
(3.375 x 6.50 in . to  
8.5 x 14 in.)  
1 Paper size is supported if set to metric.  
2 Paper size is supported if set to US.  
3 Source supports size without size sensing.  
4 Source supports size with size sensing.  
Supported paper types and weights  
The printer engine supports 60–120 g/m (16–74 lb) paper weights. The duplex unit supports 64–128 g/m (17–34 lb)  
paper weights.  
Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.  
Paper type  
150‑  
sheet  
tray  
250‑  
sheet  
tray  
520‑  
sheet  
tray  
MP  
Feeder  
Manual  
Paper  
Manual  
Envelope  
Duplex  
ADF  
Flatbed  
Paper  
X
• Plain  
• Bond  
• Glossy  
• Heavy Glossy  
• Colored  
• Custom Type [x]  
• Letterhead  
• Light  
• Heavy  
• Preprinted  
• Rough/ Cotton  
• Recycled  
Card stock  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Transparencies  
Labels  
• Paper  
• Vinyl  
Envelopes  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printing  
96  
Printing  
Printing a document  
Printing a document  
1 From the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.  
2 Send the print job:  
For Windows users  
a With a document open, click File > Print.  
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.  
c Adjust the settings, if necessary.  
d Click OK > Print.  
For Macintosh users  
a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog:  
1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.  
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.  
3 Click OK.  
b Customize the settings in the Print dialog:  
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.  
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.  
2 From the print options pop‑up menus, adjust the settings, if necessary.  
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or  
select the appropriate tray or feeder.  
3 Click Print.  
Printing in black and white  
From the home screen, navigate to:  
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Print Mode > Black Only > Submit  
Adjusting toner darkness  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Printing  
97  
3 Adjust the toner darkness setting.  
4 Click Submit.  
Printing from a mobile device  
For the list of supported mobile devices and to download a compatible mobile printing application, visit  
http://lexmark.com/mobile.  
Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.  
Printing from a flash drive  
Printing from a flash drive  
Notes:  
• Before printing an encrypted PDF file, enter the file password from the printer control panel.  
• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.  
1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.  
The USB Drive home screen appears.  
Notes:  
• If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the  
printer ignores the flash drive.  
• If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busyappears. After these  
print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Printing  
98  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, any connector, the memory  
device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. A  
loss of data can occur.  
2 From the printer control panel, touch Print from USB, and then select the document you want to print.  
3 Touch the arrows to increase the number of copies to print, and then touch Print.  
Notes:  
• Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.  
• If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then you can still print  
files from the flash drive as held jobs.  
Supported flash drives and file types  
Flash drive  
File type  
Documents:  
• .pdf  
• Lexar JumpDrive 2.0 Pro (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)  
• SanDisk Cruzer Mini (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)  
• .xps  
Notes:  
Images:  
• .dcx  
• .gif  
• .JPEG  
• .jpg  
• Hi‑Speed USB flash drives must support the Full‑Speed standard. Devices supporting only USB  
low‑speed capabilities are not supported.  
• USB flash drives must support the FAT (File Allocation Tables) system. Devices formatted with NTFS  
(New Technology File System) or any other file system are not supported.  
• .bmp  
• .pcx  
• .TIFF  
• .tif  
• .png  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printing  
99  
Printing on specialty media  
Tips on using letterhead  
• Use letterhead designed specifically for laser/LED printers.  
• Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.  
• Before loading letterhead, flex the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.  
• Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead.  
Source  
Print side  
Paper orientation  
Standard and optional trays (simplex printing)  
Preprinted letterhead  
design is placed faceup.  
When feeding short edge, the top  
edge of the sheet with the logo is  
placed at the right side of the tray.  
When feeding long‑edge, the  
letter head should go to the rear  
of the printer.  
Standard and optional trays (duplex printing)  
Multipurpose feeder (simplex printing)  
Multipurpose feeder (duplex printing)  
Preprinted letterhead  
design is placed facedown. logo is placed at the right side of  
the tray.  
Thetop edgeof thesheet with the  
Preprinted letterhead  
design is placed facedown. logo should enter the  
multipurpose feeder first.  
Thetop edgeof thesheet with the  
Preprinted letterhead  
design is placed faceup.  
Thetop edgeof thesheet with the  
logo should enter the  
multipurpose feeder last.  
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the chosen preprinted letterhead is acceptable  
for laser/LED printers.  
Tips on using transparencies  
• Print samples on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.  
• Feed transparencies from the standard tray or from the multipurpose feeder.  
• From the Paper menu, set the Paper Type to Transparency.  
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser/LED printers. Transparencies must be able to withstand  
temperatures of 230°C (446°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.  
• To prevent print quality problems, avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies.  
• Before loading transparencies, flex the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.  
• We recommend Lexmark transparencies. For ordering information, see the Lexmark Web site at  
www.lexmark.com.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Printing  
100  
Tips on using envelopes  
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.  
• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser/LED printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that  
the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or  
releasing hazardous emissions.  
• For best performance, use envelopes made from 90‑g/m2 (24‑lb bond) paper or 25% cotton. All‑cotton envelopes  
must not exceed 70‑g/m2 (20‑lb bond) weight.  
• Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.  
• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:  
– Have excessive curl or twist.  
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way.  
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing.  
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars.  
– Have an interlocking design.  
– Have postage stamps attached.  
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position.  
– Have bent corners.  
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes.  
• Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.  
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.  
Tips on using labels  
Note: Use paper label sheets for occasional use only. Vinyl, pharmacy, and dual‑sided labels are not supported.  
For detailed information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available on  
the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.  
When printing on labels:  
• Use labels designed specifically for laser/LED printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:  
– The labels can withstand temperatures up to 210°C (410°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or  
releasing hazardous emissions.  
Note: Labels can be printed at a higher fusing temperature up to 220°C (428°F) if Label Weight is set to  
Heavy. Select this setting using the Embedded Web Server, or from the printer control panel Paper menu.  
– Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi (172 kPa) pressure without  
delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.  
• Do not use labels with slick backing material.  
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets  
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and cartridge warranties.  
• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.  
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die‑cuts of the label.  
• Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge. Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.)  
away from edges is recommended. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing  
101  
• If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, remove a 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) strip on the leading and driver edge, and  
use a non‑oozing adhesive.  
• Portrait orientation works best, especially when printing bar codes.  
Tips on using card stock  
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,  
and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before  
buying large quantities.  
• From the Paper menu, set the Paper Type to Card Stock.  
• Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.  
• Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or  
other paper handling problems.  
• Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F)  
without releasing hazardous emissions.  
• Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting  
introduces semi‑liquid and volatile components into the printer.  
• Use grain short card stock when possible.  
Printing confidential and other held jobs  
Storing print jobs in the printer  
You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control  
panel.  
All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.  
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to  
process additional held jobs.  
Print job type  
Description  
Confidential  
Confidential lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from  
the control panel.  
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the  
numbers 0–9.  
Verify  
Verify lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining  
copies. It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is  
automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are printed.  
Reserve  
Repeat  
Reserve allows the printer to store print jobs for printing at a later time. The print  
jobs are held until deleted from the Help Jobs menu.  
Repeat prints and stores print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Printing  
102  
Printing confidential and other held jobs  
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve  
jobs are held in the printer until you delete them.  
For Windows users  
1 With a document open, click File > Print.  
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.  
3 Click Print and Hold.  
4 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential  
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.  
5 Click OK or Print.  
6 From the printer home screen, release the print job.  
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:  
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print  
• For other print jobs, navigate to:  
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print  
For Macintosh users  
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.  
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.  
2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop‑up menu, choose Job Routing.  
3 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential  
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.  
4 Click OK or Print.  
5 From the printer home screen, release the print job.  
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:  
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print  
• For other print jobs, navigate to:  
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print  
Printing information pages  
Printing a font sample list  
1 From the home screen, navigate to:  
> Reports > Print Fonts  
2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Printing  
103  
Printing a directory list  
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or on the printer hard disk.  
From the home screen, navigate to:  
> Reports > Print Directory  
Using Max Speed and Max Yield  
The Max Speed and Max Yield settings let you choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield. Max Yield  
is the factory default setting.  
• Max Speed—Prints in color unless Black Only is selected in the driver. Prints in black only if the Black Only driver  
setting is selected.  
• Max Yield—Switches from black to color based on the color content found on each page. Frequent color mode  
switching can result in slower printing if the content of pages is mixed.  
Using the Embedded Web Server  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Configuration > Print Settings > Setup Menu.  
3 From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.  
4 Click Submit.  
Using the printer control panel  
1 Navigate to:  
> Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu  
2 From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.  
3 Touch Submit.  
Canceling a print job  
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel  
1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press  
on the keypad.  
2 Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.  
Note: If you press  
on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Printing  
104  
Canceling a print job from the computer  
For Windows users  
1 Open the printers folder.  
In Windows 8  
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:  
Apps list > Run > type control printers> OK  
In Windows 7 or earlier  
a Click  
or click Start, and then click Run.  
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.  
c Press Enter, or click OK.  
2 Double‑click the printer icon.  
3 Select the print job you want to cancel.  
4 Click Delete.  
For Macintosh users  
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:  
• System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Open Print Queue  
• System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Open Print Queue  
2 From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copying  
105  
Copying  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or  
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings).  
Making copies  
Making a quick copy  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 Adjust the paper guides when loading a document into the ADF.  
Note: Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same. Failure to set the  
proper size may result to a cropped image.  
3 From the printer control panel, press  
to start copying.  
Copying using the ADF  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 Adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Copy > change the copy settings > Copy It  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Copying  
106  
Copying using the scanner glass  
1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
2 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Copy > change the copy settings > Copy It  
3 If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the Next  
Page.  
4 Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.  
Copying film photos  
1 Place a photo facedown on the upper left corner of the scanner glass.  
2 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Copy > Content > Photo >  
> Photo/Film >  
> Copy It > Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job  
Copying on specialty media  
Copying on transparencies  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Copy > Copy from > size of the original document >  
4 Touch Copy to, and then select the tray that contains transparencies, or touch Manual Feeder Size.  
5 Load transparencies in the multipurpose feeder.  
6 From the home screen, navigate to:  
> select the desired size of the transparencies > Manual Feeder Type >  
> Copy It  
Copying on letterhead  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Copy > Copy from > size of the original document > Copy to > Manual Feeder  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Copying  
107  
4 Place the letterhead faceup, top edge first in the multipurpose feeder.  
5 Select the size of the letterhead.  
6 Navigate to:  
Continue > Letterhead > Continue > Copy It  
Customizing copy settings  
Copying to a different size  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Copy from > select the size of the original document >  
.
5 Touch Copy to > select the size of the copy >  
.
Note: The printer will scale the size automatically.  
6 Touch Copy It.  
Making copies using paper from a selected tray  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Copy > Copy from > size of the original document > Copy to  
4 Touch Manual Feeder or select the tray that contains the paper type you want to use.  
Note: If you choose Manual Feeder, then you will also need to select the paper size and type.  
5 Touch Copy It.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Copying  
108  
Copying different paper sizes  
Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the “Copy  
to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper  
size (Example 2).  
Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >  
> Copy to > Auto Size Match >  
> Copy It  
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes  
corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.  
Example 2: Copying on a single paper size  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >  
> Copy to > Letter >  
> Copy It  
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on  
the paper size selected.  
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 From the Sides (Duplex) area, touch the button for your preferred duplexing method.  
The first number represents sides of the original documents; the second number represents sides of the copy. For  
example, select 1‑sided to 2‑sided if you have 1-sided original documents and you want 2‑sided copies.  
5 Touch  
, and then Copy It.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Copying  
109  
Reducing or enlarging copies  
Copies can be reduced to 25% of the original document size or enlarged to 400% of the original document size. The  
factory default setting for Scale is Auto. If you leave Scale set to Auto, the content of your original document will be  
scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.  
To reduce or enlarge a copy:  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 From the Scale area, touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies.  
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.  
5 Touch Copy It.  
Adjusting copy quality  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Copy > Content  
4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying:  
• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.  
• Graphic—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and  
animations.  
• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.  
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.  
5 Touch  
.
6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying:  
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.  
• Black/White—Use when the original document was printed using a black/white laser printer.  
• Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer.  
• Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.  
• Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.  
• Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Copying  
110  
• Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.  
• Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.  
7 Touch  
> Copy It.  
Collating copies  
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print each copy as a set (collated) or to print the  
copies as groups of pages (not collated).  
Collated  
Not collated  
By default, Collate is set to On. If you do not want to collate your copies, then change the setting to Off:  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > Off >  
> Copy It  
Placing separator sheets between copies  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets  
Note: Collate must be set to On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies. If Collate is set to Off,  
then the separator sheets are added to the end of the print job.  
4 Select one of the following:  
• Between Copies  
• Between Jobs  
• Between Pages  
• Off  
5 Touch  
, and then Copy It.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Copying  
111  
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet  
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto a single  
sheet of paper.  
Notes:  
• The Paper Size must be set to Letter, Legal, A4, or JIS B5.  
• The Copy Size must be set to 100%.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Copy > Advanced Options > Paper Saver > select desired output >  
> Copy It  
Creating a custom copy job (job build)  
The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each  
set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the  
scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters, and then it scans the next set with the  
same or different parameters.  
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:  
• If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.  
• If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty.  
• If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.  
For example:  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Copy > Options > Custom Job > On > Done > Copy It  
When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.  
4 Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch  
Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed.  
Note: If required, change the job settings.  
5 If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Copying  
112  
Placing information on copies  
Placing the date and time at the top of each page  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer  
4 Pick an area of the page where you want to place the date and time.  
5 Touch Yes or No >  
> Copy It.  
Placing an overlay message on each page  
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom or Draft.  
To place a message on the copies:  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Copy > Advanced Options > Overlay > select overlay message >  
.
4 Touch Copy It.  
Canceling a copy job  
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF  
When the ADF begins processing a document, the scanning screen appears. To cancel the copy job, touch Cancel Job  
on the touch screen.  
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job.  
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass  
Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen.  
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. Once the job is canceled, the copy screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Copying  
113  
Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed  
1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press  
on the keypad.  
2 Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.  
Note: If you press  
on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.  
Understanding the copy screens and options  
Copy from  
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size of the original document.  
• Touch a paper size that matches the original document.  
• Touch Mixed Sizes to copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width.  
• Touch Auto Size Sense to allow the scanner to automatically determine the size of the original document.  
Copy to  
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.  
• Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.  
• If the settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting  
to accommodate the difference.  
• If the paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, then touch Manual Feeder,  
and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder.  
• When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the paper size of the original document. If a matching  
paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not foundappears and prompts to load a paper in a  
tray or multipurpose feeder.  
Copies  
This option allows you to set the number of copies to be printed.  
Scale  
This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25% and 400%. Scale can  
also be set for you automatically.  
• When you want to copy from one size of paper to another, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, setting the  
“Copy from” and “Copy to” paper sizes automatically changes the scale tokeep all the original document information  
on your copy.  
• Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1%; touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1%.  
• Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change.  
• Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Copying  
114  
Darkness  
This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document.  
Sides (Duplex)  
Use this option to select duplex settings. You can print copies on one or two sides, make two-sided copies (duplex) of  
two-sided original documents, make two-sided copies from one-sided original documents, or make one-sided copies  
(simplex) from two-sided original documents.  
Collate  
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document. The  
factory default setting for Collate is on; the output pages of your copies will be ordered (1,2,3) (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If you  
want all the copies of each page to remain together, turn Collate off, and your copies will be ordered (1,1,1) (2,2,2)  
(3,3,3).  
Content  
This option lets you set the original document type and source.  
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.  
• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.  
• Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and  
animations.  
• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.  
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.  
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.  
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.  
• Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.  
• Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.  
• Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.  
• Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.  
• Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.  
• Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.  
• Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.  
Color  
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Copying  
115  
Advanced Options  
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:  
• ADF Skew Fix—Use to correct slight skew in the scanned image.  
• Advanced Duplex—Use to specify the document orientation, whether documents are one-sided or two-sided, and  
how documents are bound.  
Note: Some Advanced Duplex options are available only on select printers.  
• Advanced Imaging—Use to change or adjust Auto Center, Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout,  
Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings  
before you copy the document.  
• Create Booklet—Use to create a booklet. You can choose between 1‑sided and 2‑sided booklets.  
Note: This option appears only when a print duplexer and printer hard disk are installed.  
• Cover Page Setup—Use to set copy cover page and booklet cover page.  
• Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.  
• Edge Erase—Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate  
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within  
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.  
• Header/Footer—Use to turn on Date/Time, Page number, Bates number, or Custom text, and prints them in the  
specified header or footer location.  
• Margin Shift—Use to increase the size of the margin of an specified distance by shifting the scanned image. This  
can be useful in providing space to bind or hole-punch copies. Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much  
of a margin you want. If the additional margin is too large, then the copy will be cropped.  
• Overlay—Use to create a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose between  
Urgent, Confidential, Copy, and Draft, or you can enter a custom message in the ”Enter custom text” field. The word  
you pick will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.  
Note: A custom overlay can also be created by your system support person. When a custom overlay is created, a  
button with an icon of that overlay will be available.  
• Paper Saver—Use to print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page. Paper Saver is  
also called N-up printing. The N stands for Number. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document on  
a single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page. Touching Print Page Borders  
adds or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page.  
• Separator Sheets—Use to place a blank piece of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator sheets  
can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are  
printed on.  
Save As Shortcut  
This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut by assigning a number.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
E-mailing  
116  
E-mailing  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or  
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings).  
You can use the printer to e‑mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an e‑mail  
from the printer. You can type the e‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.  
Getting ready to e-mail  
Setting up the e-mail function  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Under Default Settings, click E-mail/FTP Settings.  
4 Click E-mail Settings > Setup E-mail Server.  
5 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.  
6 Click Submit.  
Configuring e‑mail settings  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
E-mailing  
117  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.  
3 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.  
4 Click Submit.  
Creating an e-mail shortcut  
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.  
4 Type a unique name for the recipient, and then enter the e-mail address.  
Note: If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma (,).  
5 Select the scan settings (Format, Content, Color, and Resolution).  
6 Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.  
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen  
1 From the home screen, navigate to:  
E-mail > Recipient > type an e‑mail address  
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.  
2 Touch  
.
3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.  
4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.  
If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
E-mailing  
118  
E-mailing a document  
Sending an e-mail using the touch screen  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
Note: Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same. Failure to set the  
proper size may result to a cropped image.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
E-mail > Recipient  
4 Enter the e‑mail address, or press  
and then enter the shortcut number.  
To enter additional recipients, touch Next Address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to  
add.  
Note: You can also enter an e‑mail address using the address book.  
5 Touch Done > Send It.  
Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 Press , enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch  
.
To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to  
add.  
4 Touch Send It.  
Sending an e‑mail using the address book  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
E-mail >Recipient(s) >  
> enter the name of recipient > Browse shortcuts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
E-mailing  
119  
4 Touch the name of the recipients.  
To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to  
add, or search the address book.  
5 Touch Done.  
Customizing e-mail settings  
Adding e-mail subject and message information  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, touch E-mail.  
4 Type an e‑mail address.  
5 Touch Options > Subject.  
6 Type the e-mail subject.  
7 Touch Done > Message.  
8 Type an e-mail message.  
9 Touch Done > E-mail It.  
Changing the output file type  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
E-mail > Recipient > type an e‑mail address > Send as  
4 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.  
• PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided  
free by Adobe at www.adobe.com.  
• Secure PDF—Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.  
• TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the  
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent  
JPEG.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
E-mailing  
120  
• JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most  
Web browsers and graphics programs.  
• XPS—UsethistocreateasingleXML Paper Specification(XPS) file withmultiple pages, viewable using an Internet  
Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third‑party standalone viewer.  
5 Touch E‑mail It.  
Note: If you selected Secure PDF, you will be prompted to enter your password twice.  
Canceling an e-mail  
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanningappears.  
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanningappears, or while Scan the Next Page/  
Finish the Jobappears.  
Understanding e-mail options  
Recipients  
This option lets you enter the destination of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e‑mail addresses.  
Subject  
This option lets you enter a subject line for your e-mail.  
Message  
This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.  
File Name  
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.  
Original Size  
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e-mail.  
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The e‑mail screen appears with the new  
setting displayed.  
• When “Original Size” is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.  
• When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original  
document.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
E-mailing  
121  
Resolution  
Adjusts the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file size and the time  
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e-mail file size.  
Color  
This option sets the output color for the scanned image. Touch to enable or disable color.  
Content  
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.  
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.  
• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.  
• Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and  
animations.  
• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.  
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.  
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.  
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.  
• Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.  
• Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.  
• Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.  
• Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.  
• Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.  
• Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.  
• Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.  
Darkness  
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.  
Send As  
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.  
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by  
Adobe at www.adobe.com.  
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access  
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded  
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.  
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate filefor each page of your originaldocument, viewablebymostWebbrowsers  
and graphics programs  
• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET  
Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
E-mailing  
122  
Page Setup  
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.  
• Sides (Duplex)— Specifies if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both  
sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.  
• Orientation— Specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes Sides and Binding to match the  
orientation.  
• Binding— Specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.  
Scan Preview  
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the  
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.  
Advanced Options  
Touching this button opens a screen where you can change ADF Skew Fix, Advanced Imaging, Custom Job, Edge Erase,  
and Transmission Log settings.  
• ADF Skew Fix—This lets you correct slight skew in the scanned image.  
• Advanced Imaging—This lets you adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG  
Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings  
before you e‑mail the document.  
• Custom Job—This lets you combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job  
• Edge Erase—This lets you eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to  
eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever  
is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.  
• Transmission Log—This lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Faxing  
123  
Faxing  
Note: Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models.  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or  
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings).  
Getting the printer ready to fax  
The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions.  
Note: During the initial printer setup, deselect Fax and any other function you plan to set up later, and then touch  
Continue. The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or  
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning  
storm.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or  
receiving a fax.  
Initial fax setup  
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: station name (identification of the business, other  
     
Faxing  
124  
Choosing a fax connection  
Notes:  
• The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the telephone wall outlet. Other  
devices(such as a telephone or answering machine) can be successfully attached to pass through the printer, as  
described in the setup steps.  
• If you want a digital connection such as ISDN, DSL, or ADSL, then a third-party device (such as a DSL filter) is  
required. Contact your DSL provider for a DSL filter. The DSL filter removes the digital signal on the telephone  
line that can interfere with the ability of the printer to fax properly.  
• You do not need to attach the printer to a computer, but you do need to connect it to an analog telephone line  
to send and receive faxes.  
Equipment and service options  
Fax connection setup  
Connect directly to the telephone line.  
See “Connecting to an analog telephone line” on page 124.  
Connect to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL or ADSL) service. See “Connecting to a DSL service” on page 125.  
Connect to a Private Branch eXchange (PBX) or Integrated See “Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system” on page 125.  
Services Digital Network (ISDN) system.  
Use a Distinctive Ring service.  
See “Connecting to a distinctive ring service” on page 126.  
Connect through an adapter used in your area.  
See “Connecting to an adapter for your country or region” on  
page 126.  
Connecting to an analog telephone line  
If your telecommunications equipment uses a US‑style (RJ11) telephone line, then follow these steps to connect the  
equipment:  
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port  
.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Faxing  
125  
Connecting to a DSL service  
If you subscribe to a DSL service, then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord, and then  
follow these steps to connect the equipment:  
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port  
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter.  
.
Note: Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration.  
3 Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack.  
3
1
2
Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system  
If you use a PBX or ISDN converter or terminal adapter, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:  
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port  
.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use.  
Notes:  
• Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region.  
• Depending on the ISDN port assignment, you may have to connect to a specific port.  
• When using a PBX system, make sure the call waiting tone is off.  
• When using a PBX system, dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number.  
• For more information on using the fax with a PBX system, see the documentation that came with your PBX  
system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Faxing  
126  
Connecting to a distinctive ring service  
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone service provider. This service allows you to have multiple  
telephone numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be  
useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these  
steps to connect the equipment:  
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port  
.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.  
3 Change the Distinctive Rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer:  
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This allows the printer to answer single, double, and  
triple ring patterns.  
a From the home screen, navigate to:  
> Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Settings > Distinctive Rings  
b Select the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch Submit.  
Connecting to an adapter for your country or region  
The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the active telephone  
wall jack:  
Country/Region  
• Austria  
• Cyprus  
• Denmark  
• Finland  
• France  
• Germany  
• Ireland  
• Italy  
• New Zealand  
• Netherlands  
• Norway  
• Portugal  
• Sweden  
• Switzerland  
• United Kingdom  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Faxing  
127  
For some countries or regions, a telephone line adapter is included in the box. Use this adapter to connect an answering  
machine, telephone, or other telecommunications equipment to the printer.  
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port  
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter, and then connect the adapter to the active telephone  
wall jack.  
Note: Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown. It will fit the wall jack used in your  
location.  
Setting the outgoing fax or station name and number  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.  
3 In the Fax Name or Station Name field, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.  
4 In the Fax Number or Station Number field, enter the printer fax number.  
5 Click Submit.  
Setting the date and time  
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, then you may  
have to reset the date and time.  
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Faxing  
128  
3 In the Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.  
4 Click Submit.  
Note: It is recommended to use the network time.  
Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time  
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:  
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.  
3 Select the Automatically Observe DST checkbox, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time  
Zone Setup section.  
4 Click Submit.  
Creating shortcuts  
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server  
Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to send  
a fax, you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number. A shortcut can be created to a single  
fax number or a group of fax numbers.  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.  
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support  
person.  
3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.  
To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.  
Note: Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).  
4 Assign a shortcut number.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.  
5 Click Add.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Faxing  
129  
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Fax > enter the fax number  
To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.  
4 Navigate to:  
> enter a name for the shortcut > Done > OK > Fax It  
Sending a fax  
Sending a fax using the touch screen  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, touch Fax.  
4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad.  
To add recipients, touch Next Number and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or  
search the address book.  
Note: To place a dial pause within a fax number, press . The dial pause appears as a comma in the “Fax to”  
box. Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first.  
5 Touch Fax It.  
Sending a fax using the computer  
The printer driver fax option allows you to “print to fax,” where the printer will send a queued document as a fax rather  
than print it. The fax option functions as a normal fax machine, but is controlled through the printer driver instead of  
the printer control panel.  
1 With a document open, click File > Print.  
2 Select the printer, and then navigate to:  
Properties > Fax tab > Enable fax  
3 Enter the recipient fax number(s) in the “Fax number(s)” field.  
Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature.  
4 If necessary, enter a prefix in the Dialing prefix field.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Faxing  
130  
5 Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation.  
6 If you want to include a cover page with the fax, then select Include cover page with fax, and enter the appropriate  
information.  
7 Click OK.  
Notes:  
• The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For information on  
installing these drivers, see the Software and Documentation CD.  
• The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under Configuration tab before it can be  
used.  
• If the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected, then you will be prompted to verify the  
recipient information before the fax is sent. If this check box is not selected, then the queued document will be  
sent automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab.  
Sending a fax using shortcuts  
Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. A shortcut number (1–99999) can  
contain a single recipient or multiple recipients.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not place postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as  
magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 Press  
, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.  
4 Touch Fax It.  
Sending a fax using the address book  
The address book enables you to search for bookmarks and network directory servers.  
Note: If the address book feature is not enabled, then contact your system support person.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Fax >  
> Browse shortcuts  
4 Using the virtual keyboard, type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find.  
Note: Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time.  
5 Touch Done > Fax It.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Faxing  
131  
Customizing fax settings  
Changing the fax resolution  
Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (slowest speed, best quality).  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Fax > enter the fax number > Options  
4 From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want.  
5 Touch Fax It.  
Making a fax lighter or darker  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Fax > enter the fax number > Options  
4 From the Darkness area, touch the arrows to adjust the darkness of the fax.  
5 Touch Fax It.  
Sending a fax at a scheduled time  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Fax > enter the fax number > Options > Advanced Options > Delayed Send  
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for transmission  
are listed in the Fax Queue.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Faxing  
132  
4 Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted.  
The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes. If the current time is shown, the left arrow is  
unavailable.  
5 Touch Fax It.  
Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.  
Viewing a fax log  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings > Reports > Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.  
Blocking junk faxes  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.  
Notes:  
• This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name.  
• In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to  
block.  
Canceling an outgoing fax  
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning  
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning…appears.  
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning…appears or while Scan the Next Page/  
Finish the Jobappears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Faxing  
133  
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory  
1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.  
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.  
2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.  
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the  
job you want to cancel.  
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.  
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.  
Understanding fax options  
Content  
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.  
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.  
• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.  
• Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and  
animations.  
• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.  
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.  
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.  
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.  
• Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.  
• Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.  
• Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.  
• Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.  
• Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.  
• Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.  
• Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.  
Resolution  
This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax. If you are faxing a photo, a  
drawing with fine lines, or a document with very small text, then increase the Resolution setting. This will increase the  
amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output.  
• Standard—Suitable for most documents  
• Fine 200 dpi—Recommended for documents with small print  
• Super fine 300 dpi—Recommended for original documents with fine detail  
• Ultra fine 600 dpi—Recommended for documents with pictures or photos  
Note: Fine 200 dpi and Super fine 300 dpi is displayed when color printing is selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Faxing  
134  
Darkness  
This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document.  
Color  
This option enables or disables color in faxing.  
Page Setup  
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding settings.  
• Sides (Duplex)—Use to specify if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both  
sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.  
• Orientation—Use to specify the orientation of the original document, and then changes Sides and Binding to match  
the orientation.  
• Binding—Use to specify if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.  
Scan Preview  
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the  
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.  
Delayed Send  
This lets you send a fax at a later time or date.  
1 Set up your fax.  
2 From the home screen, navigate to:  
Delayed Send > enter the date and time you want to send your fax > Done  
Note: If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent, then the fax is sent the next time the  
printer is turned on.  
This setting can be especially useful in sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain  
hours, or when transmission times are cheaper.  
Advanced Options  
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:  
• ADF Skew Fix—Use to correct slight skew in the scanned image.  
• AdvancedImaging—Use to adjust the Background Removal, Contrast, Color Balance, Negative Image, Mirror Image,  
Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you fax the document.  
• Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.  
• Edge Erase—Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate  
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within  
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.  
• Transmission Log—Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Faxing  
135  
Holding and forwarding faxes  
Holding faxes  
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or  
at a scheduled day or time.  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.  
3 In the Print Faxes Password field, enter a password.  
4 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:  
• Off  
• Always On  
• Manual  
• Scheduled  
5 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:  
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.  
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.  
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.  
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.  
6 Click Add.  
Forwarding a fax  
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings.  
3 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select one of the following:  
• Print  
• Print and Forward  
• Forward  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Faxing  
136  
4 From the “Forward to” menu, select one of the following:  
• Fax  
• E‑mail  
• FTP  
• LDSS  
• eSF  
5 In the Forward to Shortcut field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.  
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.  
6 Click Submit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scanning to an FTP address  
137  
Scanning to an FTP address  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or  
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings).  
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be  
sent to the server at a time.  
Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes  
available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination could also be  
another PostScript printer; for example, a color document can be scanned, and then sent to a color printer. Sending a  
document to an FTP server is similar to sending a fax. The difference is that you are sending the information over your  
network instead of over the phone line.  
Creating shortcuts  
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to  
an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for  
creating shortcut numbers: using the Embedded Web Server and using the printer touch screen.  
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts.  
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support  
person.  
4 Click FTP Shortcut Setup.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Scanning to an FTP address  
138  
5 Enter the appropriate information.  
6 Enter a shortcut number.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.  
7 Click Add.  
Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen  
1 From the home screen, navigate to:  
FTP > type the FTP address >  
> enter a name for the shortcut > Done  
2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect, then  
touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.  
3 Touch Submit.  
Scanning to an FTP address  
Scanning to an FTP address using the touch screen  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Send It  
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 Press , and then enter the FTP shortcut number.  
4 Touch Send It.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Scanning to an FTP address  
139  
Scanning to an FTP address using the address book  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the home screen, navigate to:  
FTP > FTP >  
> enter the name of recipient > Browse shortcuts > name of recipient > Search  
Understanding FTP options  
FTP  
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.  
Note: Addresses should be in dot notation form (for example: yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy).  
File Name  
This option lets you enter the file name of the scanned document.  
Original Size  
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents for FTP sending.  
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The FTP screen appears with the new setting  
displayed.  
• When “Original Size” is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.  
• When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original  
document.  
Send As  
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.  
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by  
Adobe at www.adobe.com.  
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access  
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded  
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.  
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate filefor each page of your originaldocument, viewablebymostWebbrowsers  
and graphics programs  
• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET  
Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Scanning to an FTP address  
140  
Color  
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.  
Resolution  
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time  
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.  
Darkness  
This option adjusts how light or dark your files will turn out in relation to the original document.  
Page Setup  
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.  
• Sides (Duplex)— Specifies if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both  
sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned.  
• Orientation— Specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides and Binding settings  
to match the orientation.  
• Binding— Specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.  
Content  
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.  
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.  
• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.  
• Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and  
animations.  
• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.  
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.  
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.  
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.  
• Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.  
• Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.  
• Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.  
• Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.  
• Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.  
• Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.  
• Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Scanning to an FTP address  
141  
Scan Preview  
This option displays the first page of the original document before it is scanned completely. When the first page is  
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.  
Advanced Options  
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:  
• ADF Skew Fix—Use to correct slight skew in the scanned image.  
• Advanced Imaging—Use to adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,  
Negative Image, Mirror Image, Scan edge to edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature image output  
settings before sending the image file.  
• Edge Erase—Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate  
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within  
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.  
• Transmission Log—Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log.  
• Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scanning to a computer or flash drive  
142  
Scanning to a computer or flash drive  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or  
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings).  
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be directly  
connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images. You can scan the document back to the computer over  
the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer.  
Scanning to a computer  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Scan Profile > Create.  
3 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.  
4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file.  
5 Enter a scan name.  
The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.  
6 Click Submit.  
7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.  
A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit. You can use this shortcut number when  
you are ready to scan your documents.  
a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as  
magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
b If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scanning to a computer or flash drive  
143  
c Press , and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, or touch Held Jobs on the home screen, and  
then touch Profiles.  
d After entering the shortcut number, the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program  
you specified. If you touched Profiles on the home screen, then locate your shortcut on the list.  
8 Return to the computer to view the file.  
The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.  
Scanning to a flash drive  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.  
The USB Drive home screen appears.  
4 Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.  
5 Adjust the scan settings.  
6 Touch Scan It.  
Understanding the Scan Center features  
The Scan Center software lets you modify scan settings and select where to send the scanned output. Scan settings  
modified with the Scan Center software can be saved and used for other scan jobs.  
The following features are available:  
• Scan and send images to your computer  
• Convert scanned images to text  
• Preview the scanned image and adjust the brightness and contrast  
• Make larger scans without losing detail  
• Scan two‑sided documents  
Using the ScanBack Utility  
You can use the Lexmark ScanBackTM Utility to create scan‑to‑PC profiles. The ScanBack Utility can be downloaded from  
the Lexmark Web site on http://support.lexmark.com.  
1 Set up a scan‑to‑PC profile:  
a Launch the ScanBack Utility.  
b Select the printer.  
If no printers are listed, then contact your system support person, or click Setup to manually search for an IP  
address or host name.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Scanning to a computer or flash drive  
144  
c Follow the instructions on your computer screen to define the type of document being scanned and what kind  
of output you want to create.  
d Select any of the following:  
• Show MFP Instructions—View or print the instructions.  
• Create Shortcut—Save this group of settings to use again.  
e Click Finish.  
A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images.  
2 Scan original documents:  
a Load all pages in the ADF or on the scanner glass.  
b From the printer control panel, navigate to:  
Scan/Email > Profiles > select your scan profile > Submit  
Note: The output file is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified.  
Understanding scan profile options  
Original Size  
This option sets the size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan  
an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).  
Resolution  
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time  
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.  
Color  
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.  
Content  
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.  
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.  
• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.  
• Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and  
animations.  
• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.  
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.  
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.  
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.  
• Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Scanning to a computer or flash drive  
145  
• Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.  
• Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.  
• Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.  
• Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.  
• Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.  
• Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.  
Darkness  
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.  
Page Setup  
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.  
• Sides (Duplex)— Use this to specify if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on  
both sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.  
• Orientation— Use this to specify the orientation of the original document, and then change Sides and Binding to  
match the orientation.  
• Binding— Use this to specify if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge of the page.  
Scan Preview  
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the  
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.  
Advanced Options  
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:  
• ADF Skew Fix— Use this to correct slight skew in the scanned image.  
• Advanced Imaging— Use this to change or adjust Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast,  
JPEG Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature before  
scanning a document.  
• Custom Job—Use this to combine multiple scan jobs into a single scan job.  
• Edge Erase—Use this to remove smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to  
eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever  
is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scanned image.  
• Transmission Log—Use this to print the transmission log or transmission error log.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Understanding printer menus  
146  
Understanding printer menus  
Menus list  
Supplies  
Paper Menu  
Reports  
Network/Ports  
Replace Supply  
Default Source  
Paper Size/Type  
Configure MP  
Substitute Size  
Paper Weight  
Paper Loading  
Custom Types  
Custom Names  
Menu Settings Page  
Device Statistics  
Network Setup Page  
Network [x] Setup Page  
Shortcut List  
Active NIC  
Standard Network or Network [x]1  
Cyan Cartridge  
Magenta Cartridge  
Yellow Cartridge  
Black Cartridge  
Standard USB  
Parallel [x]  
Serial [x]  
Cyan Imaging Unit  
Magenta Imaging Unit  
Yellow Imaging Unit  
Black Imaging Unit  
Fax Job Log  
SMTP Setup  
Fax Call Log  
Copy Shortcuts  
Custom Scan Sizes E-mail Shortcuts  
Separator Pick Assembly and Roller Universal Setup  
Fax Shortcuts  
FTP Shortcuts  
Profiles List  
Waste Toner Bottle  
Fuser  
Transfer Module  
Maintenance Kit  
Print Fonts  
Print Directory  
Asset Report  
Security  
Settings  
Help  
Manage Shortcuts  
Edit Security Setups  
Miscellaneous Security Settings  
Confidential Print  
General Settings  
Copy Settings  
Fax Settings  
Print All Guides  
Copy Guide  
E-mail Guide  
Fax Guide  
Fax Shortcuts  
E‑mail Shortcuts  
FTP Shortcuts  
Copy Shortcuts  
Profile Shortcuts  
Disk Wiping  
E‑mail Settings  
FTP Settings  
Security Audit Log  
Set Date and Time  
FTP Guide  
Flash Drive Menu Print Defects Guide  
Print Settings  
Information Guide  
Supplies Guide  
Option Card Menu  
A list of installed download emulators (DLEs) appears.2  
1 Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network or Network [x].  
2 This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding printer menus  
147  
Supplies menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Replace Supply  
Lets you reset the supply counter for the separator pick  
assembly and roller  
Separator Pick Assembly and Roller  
Waste Toner Bottle  
• Select Yes to reset the supply counter.  
• Select No to exit.  
Cyan Cartridge  
Early Warning  
Low  
Shows the status of the cyan toner cartridge  
Shows the status of the magenta toner cartridge  
Shows the status of the yellow toner cartridge  
Invalid  
Near End of Life  
Replace  
Missing  
Defective  
OK  
Unsupported  
Magenta Cartridge  
Early Warning  
Low  
Invalid  
Near End of Life  
Replace  
Missing  
Defective  
OK  
Unsupported  
Yellow Cartridge  
Early Warning  
Low  
Invalid  
Near End of Life  
Replace  
Missing  
Defective  
OK  
Unsupported  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
148  
Menu item  
Description  
Black Cartridge  
Early Warning  
Low  
Shows the status of the black toner cartridge  
Invalid  
Near End of Life  
Replace  
Missing  
Defective  
OK  
Unsupported  
Cyan Imaging Unit  
Early Warning  
Low  
Shows the status of the cyan imaging unit  
Shows the status of the magenta imaging unit  
Shows the status of the yellow imaging unit  
Shows the status of the black imaging unit  
Replace  
Missing  
OK  
Magenta Imaging Unit  
Early Warning  
Low  
Replace  
Missing  
OK  
Yellow Imaging Unit  
Early Warning  
Low  
Replace  
Missing  
OK  
Black Imaging Unit  
Early Warning  
Low  
Replace  
Missing  
OK  
Separator Pick Assembly and Roller  
Shows the status of the separator pick assembly and roller  
Shows the status of the waste toner bottle  
OK  
Replace  
Waste Toner Bottle  
Near Full  
Replace  
Missing  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
149  
Menu item  
Description  
Fuser  
Shows the status of the fuser  
Early Warning  
Low  
Replace  
Missing  
OK  
Transfer Module  
Early Warning  
Low  
Shows the status of the transfer module  
Shows the status of the maintenance kit  
Replace  
Missing  
OK  
Maintenance Kit  
OK  
Replace  
Paper menu  
Default Source menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Default Source  
Tray [x]  
Sets a default paper source for all print jobs  
Notes:  
MP Feeder  
Manual Paper  
Manual Envelope  
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.  
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP feeder must be set to Cassette for  
MP feeder to appear as a menu setting.  
• If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and  
Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When  
one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding printer menus  
150  
Paper Size/Type menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Tray [x] Size  
(LEF) Letter  
Legal  
Specifies the paper size loaded in each tray  
Notes:  
• Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
default setting.  
JIS B4  
A3  
11 x 17  
Universal  
(LEF) A4  
• For trays with automatic size sensing, only the size detected by the  
hardware appears.  
• If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size  
and Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked.  
When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.  
Tray [x] Type  
Plain Paper  
Card Stock  
Transparency  
Recycled  
Specifies the type of paper loaded in each tray  
Notes:  
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is  
the factory default setting for all other trays.  
• If available, a user‑defined name appears instead of Custom Type [x].  
Glossy  
• If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size  
and Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked.  
When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.  
Heavy Glossy  
Labels  
Vinyl Labels  
Bond  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Colored Paper  
Light Paper  
Heavy Paper  
Rough/Cotton Paper  
Custom Type [x]  
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
151  
Menu item  
Description  
MP Feeder Size  
Letter  
Specifies the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder  
Notes:  
Legal  
Executive  
JIS B4  
A3  
11 x 17  
• Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
default setting.  
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette  
for MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.  
Oficio (México)  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
7 3/4 Envelope  
9 Envelope  
10 Envelope  
DL Envelope  
C5 Envelope  
B5 Envelope  
Other Envelope  
A4  
A5  
A6  
JIS B5  
MP Feeder Type  
Plain Paper  
Card Stock  
Specifies the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder  
Notes:  
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting.  
Transparency  
Recycled  
Glossy  
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette  
for MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.  
Heavy Glossy  
Labels  
Vinyl Labels  
Bond  
Envelope  
Rough Envelope  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Colored Paper  
Light Paper  
Heavy Paper  
Rough/Cotton Paper  
Custom Type [x]  
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
152  
Menu item  
Description  
Manual Paper Size  
Letter  
Specifies the size of the paper loaded manually  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
Legal  
default setting.  
Executive  
JIS B4  
A3  
11 x 17  
Oficio (México)  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
A4  
A5  
A6  
JIS B5  
Manual Paper Type  
Plain Paper  
Card Stock  
Specifies the type of paper loaded manually  
Note: Plain Paper is the factory default setting.  
Transparency  
Recycled  
Glossy  
Heavy Glossy  
Labels  
Vinyl Labels  
Bond  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Colored Paper  
Light Paper  
Heavy Paper  
Rough/Cotton Paper  
Custom Type [x]  
Manual Envelope Size  
10 Envelope  
Specifies the size of the envelope loaded manually  
Note: 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting. DL Envelope is the  
DL Envelope  
international factory default setting.  
C5 Envelope  
B5 Envelope  
7 3/4 Envelope  
9 Envelope  
Other Envelope  
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
153  
Menu item  
Description  
Manual Envelope Type  
Envelope  
Specifies the type of envelope loaded manually  
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.  
Rough Envelope  
Custom Type [x]  
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.  
Configure MP menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Configure MP  
Cassette  
Manual  
Determines when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder  
Notes:  
• Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the  
multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.  
First  
• Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual feed print jobs.  
• First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.  
Substitute Size menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Substitute Size  
All Listed  
Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available  
Notes:  
Off  
• All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are  
allowed.  
Statement/A5  
Letter/A4  
11 x 17/A3  
• Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed.  
• Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without a Change  
Paper message appearing.  
Paper Weight menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Plain Weight  
Normal  
Heavy  
Specifies the relative weight of the plain paper loaded  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Light  
Card Stock Weight  
Normal  
Specifies the relative weight of the card stock loaded  
Notes:  
Heavy  
Light  
• Normal is the factory default setting.  
• Settings appear only if card stock is supported.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Understanding printer menus  
154  
Menu item  
Description  
Transparency Weight  
Specifies the relative weight of the transparencies loaded  
Normal  
Heavy  
Light  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Recycled Weight  
Normal  
Specifies the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Heavy  
Light  
Glossy Weight  
Normal  
Specifies the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Heavy  
Light  
Heavy Glossy Weight  
Specifies the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded  
Heavy  
Note: Heavy is the factory default setting.  
Labels Weight  
Normal  
Specifies the relative weight of the labels loaded  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Heavy  
Light  
Vinyl Labels Weight  
Normal  
Specifies the relative weight of vinyl labels loaded  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Heavy  
Light  
Bond Weight  
Normal  
Heavy  
Specifies the relative weight of the bond paper loaded  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Light  
Envelope Weight  
Normal  
Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loaded  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Heavy  
Light  
Rough Envelope Weight  
Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loaded  
Heavy  
Light  
Note: Heavy is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Letterhead Weight  
Normal  
Specifies the relative weight of the letterhead loaded  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Heavy  
Light  
Preprinted Weight  
Normal  
Specifies the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Heavy  
Light  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
155  
Menu item  
Description  
Colored Weight  
Normal  
Specifies the relative weight of the colored paper loaded  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Heavy  
Light  
Light Weight  
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded  
Light  
Note: Light is the factory default setting.  
Heavy Weight  
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded  
Heavy  
Note: Heavy is the factory default setting.  
Rough/Cotton Weight  
Specifies the relative weight of the cotton paper loaded  
Normal  
Heavy  
Light  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Custom [x] Weight  
Normal  
Specifies the relative weight of the custom paper loaded  
Notes:  
Heavy  
Light  
• Normal is the factory default setting.  
• Settings appear only if the custom type is supported.  
Paper Loading menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Card Stock Loading  
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that  
specify Card Stock as the paper type  
Off  
Duplex  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Recycled Loading  
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that  
specify Recycled as the paper type  
Off  
Duplex  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Glossy Loading  
Off  
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that  
specify Glossy as the paper type  
Duplex  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Heavy Glossy Loading  
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that  
specify Heavy Glossy as the paper type  
Off  
Duplex  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Labels Loading  
Off  
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that  
specify Labels as the paper type  
Duplex  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Notes:  
• Duplex sets the printer default to 2‑sided printing for every print job unless 1‑sided printing is selected from Print  
Properties.  
• If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including 1‑sided print jobs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
156  
Menu item  
Description  
Vinyl Labels Loading  
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that  
specify Vinyl Labels as the paper type  
Off  
Duplex  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Bond Loading  
Off  
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that  
specify Bond as the paper type  
Duplex  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Letterhead Loading  
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that  
specify Letterhead as the paper type  
Off  
Duplex  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Preprinted Loading  
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that  
specify Preprinted as the paper type  
Off  
Duplex  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Colored Loading  
Off  
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that  
specify Colored as the paper type  
Duplex  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Light Loading  
Off  
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that  
specify Light as the paper type  
Duplex  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Heavy Loading  
Off  
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that  
specify Heavy as the paper type  
Duplex  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Rough/Cotton Loading  
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that  
specify Rough or Cotton as the paper type  
Off  
Duplex  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Custom [x] Loading  
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that  
specify Custom [x] as the paper type  
Off  
Duplex  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Custom [x] Loading is available only if the custom paper type is  
supported.  
Notes:  
• Duplex sets the printer default to 2‑sided printing for every print job unless 1‑sided printing is selected from Print  
Properties.  
• If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including 1‑sided print jobs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
157  
Custom Types menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Custom Type [x]  
Paper  
Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom  
Type [x]name or a user‑defined Custom Name created from the Embedded  
Web Server or from MarkVisionTM Professional  
Card Stock  
Transparency  
Glossy  
Rough/Cotton  
Labels  
Notes:  
• Paper is the factory default setting.  
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or  
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.  
Vinyl Labels  
Envelope  
Recycled  
Paper  
Specifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus  
Notes:  
Card Stock  
Transparency  
Glossy  
Rough/Cotton  
Labels  
• Paper is the factory default setting.  
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or  
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.  
Vinyl Labels  
Envelope  
Custom Names menu  
Menu item  
Definition  
Custom Name [x]  
Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces the Custom  
Type [x]name in the printer menus.  
[none]  
Custom Scan Sizes menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Custom Scan Size [x]  
Scan Size Name  
Width  
Specifies a custom scan size name, scan sizes, and options. The custom scan  
size name replaces Custom Scan Size [x]in the printer menus.  
Notes:  
1–11.69 inches (25–297 mm)  
Height  
1–17 inches (25–432 mm)  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Landscape  
2 scans per side  
Off  
• 11.69 inches is the US factory default setting for Width. 297 millimeters  
is the international factory default setting for Width.  
• 17 inches is the US factory default setting for Height. 432 millimeters is  
the international factory default setting for Height.  
• Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.  
• Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.  
On  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Understanding printer menus  
158  
Universal Setup menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Units of Measure  
Inches  
Identifies the unit of measure  
Note: Inches is the US factory default setting. Millimeters is the  
Millimeters  
international factory default setting.  
Portrait Width  
3–48 inches  
Sets the portrait width  
Notes:  
76–1219 mm  
• 11.69 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be  
increased in 0.01‑inch increments.  
• 296.9 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters  
can be increased in 1‑mm increments.  
• If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the  
maximum width allowed.  
Portrait Height  
3–48 inches  
Sets the portrait height  
Notes:  
76–1219 mm  
• 48 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased in  
0.01‑inch increments.  
• 1219 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can  
be increased in 1‑mm increments.  
• If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the  
maximum height allowed.  
Feed Direction  
Short Edge  
Specifies the feed direction  
Notes:  
Long Edge  
• Short Edge is the factory default setting.  
• Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the  
maximum width supported by the tray.  
Reports menu  
Reports menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Menu Settings Page  
Printsa report containing information about the paper loaded into trays, installed  
memory, total page count, alarms, timeouts, printer control panel language,  
TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection, and other  
information  
Device Statistics  
Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details  
about printed pages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Understanding printer menus  
159  
Menu item  
Description  
Network Setup Page  
Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such  
as the TCP/IP address information  
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected  
to print servers.  
Network [x] Setup Page  
Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such  
as the TCP/IP address information  
Notes:  
• This menu item is available when there is more than one network option  
installed.  
• This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to  
print servers.  
Shortcut List  
Fax Job Log  
Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts  
Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes  
Note: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the  
Fax Settings menu.  
Fax Call Log  
Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received,  
and blocked calls  
Note: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the  
Fax Settings menu.  
Copy Shortcuts  
E‑mail Shortcuts  
Fax Shortcuts  
FTP Shortcuts  
Profiles List  
Prints a report containing information about copy shortcuts  
Prints a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts  
Prints a report containing information about fax shortcuts  
Prints a report containing information about FTP shortcuts  
Prints a list of profiles stored in the printer  
Print Fonts  
Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in  
the printer  
Print Directory  
Prints a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or printer  
hard disk  
Notes:  
• Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.  
• Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed  
correctly and working.  
Asset Report  
Prints a report containing asset information including the printer serial number  
and model name. The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned  
into an asset database.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
160  
Network/Ports menu  
Active NIC menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Notes:  
Active NIC  
Auto  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
[list of available network cards]  
• This menu item appears only if an optional network card is installed.  
Standard Network or Network [x] menus  
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu; all inactive ports are omitted.  
Menu item  
Description  
PCL SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires  
it, regardless of the default printer language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer  
uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default  
printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
PS SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires  
it, regardless of the default printer language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer  
uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer  
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
NPA Mode  
Auto  
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional  
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol  
Off  
Notes:  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Understanding printer menus  
161  
Menu item  
Description  
Network Buffer  
Auto  
Sets the size of the network input buffer  
Notes:  
3KB to [maximum size allowed]  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• The value can be changed in 1‑KB increments.  
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,  
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or  
Off.  
• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or  
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.  
Job Buffering  
Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing. This menu  
only appears if a formatted disk is installed.  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
Auto  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.  
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another  
input port.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.  
Mac Binary PS  
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs  
Auto  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.  
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.  
Standard Network Setup  
Reports  
Displays and sets the printer network settings.  
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless  
Network Card  
TCP/IP  
network.  
IPv6  
Wireless  
AppleTalk  
Network [x] Setup  
Reports  
Network Card  
TCP/IP  
IPv6  
Wireless  
AppleTalk  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
162  
Network Reports menu  
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network Setup > Reports or Network  
Reports  
Menu item  
Description  
Print Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address  
Network Card menu  
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > Network Card  
Menu item  
Description  
View Card Status  
Connected  
Lets you view the connection status of the Network Card  
Disconnected  
View Card Speed  
Lets you view the speed of a currently active network card  
Lets you view the network addresses  
Network Address  
UAA  
LAA  
Job Timeout  
Sets the amount of time in seconds before a network print job is canceled  
0
Note: 90 seconds is the factory default setting.  
10–225  
Banner Page  
Allows the printer to print a banner page  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
TCP/IP menu  
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP  
Note: This menu is available only in network models or printers attached to print servers.  
Menu item  
Description  
Activate  
On  
Activates TCP/IP  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Off  
Set Hostname  
Lets you set the current TCP/IP hostname  
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Understanding printer menus  
163  
Menu item  
IP Address  
Description  
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP address  
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP  
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that  
support BOOTP and RARP.  
Netmask  
Gateway  
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP netmask  
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP gateway  
Enable DHCP  
Specifies the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Enable RARP  
Specifies the RARP address assignment setting  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Enable BOOTP  
Specifies the BOOTP address assignment setting  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Enable AutoIP  
Specifies the Zero Configuration Networking setting  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
Enable FTP/TFTP  
Enables the built-in FTP server, which allows you to send files to the printer using File  
Transfer Protocol.  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
Enable HTTP Server  
Enables the built-in web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer  
can be monitored and managed remotely using a web browser.  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
WINS Server Address  
Lets you view or change the current WINS server address  
Enable DDNS  
Lets you view or change the current DDNS setting  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
Enable mDNS  
Lets you view or change the current mDNS setting  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
DNS Server Address  
Lets you view or change the current DNS server address  
Enable HTTPS  
Lets you view or change the current HTTPS setting  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
IPv6 menu  
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
164  
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > IPv6  
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.  
Menu item  
Description  
Enable IPv6  
Enables IPv6 in the printer  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Auto Configuration  
Specifies whether the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6  
address configuration entries provided by a router  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Set Hostname  
Lets you set the hostname  
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web  
Server.  
View Address  
View Router Address  
Enable DHCPv6  
Enables DHCPv6 in the printer  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Wireless menu  
Use the following menu items to view or configure the wireless internal print server settings.  
Note: This menu is available only for models connected to a wireless network.  
The Wireless menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > Wireless  
Menu item  
Description  
WPS PBC Mode  
Lets you connect the printer to a wireless network by pressing buttons on  
both the printer and the access point (wireless router) within a given  
period of time  
WPS PIN Mode  
Lets you connect the printer to a wireless network by using a PIN on the  
printer and entering it into the wireless settings of the access point  
WPS Auto Detect  
Disable  
Automatically detects the connection method that an access point with  
WPS uses— WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) or WPS Personal  
Identification Number (PIN)  
Enable  
Note: Disable is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the network mode  
Notes:  
Network Mode  
Ad hoc  
Infrastructure  
• Ad hoc is the factory default setting. This configures wireless  
connection directly between the printer and a computer.  
• Infrastructure lets the printer access a network using an access  
point.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
165  
Menu item  
Description  
Compatibility  
802.11b/g/n  
802.11n  
Specifies the wireless standard for the wireless network  
Note: The 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.  
802.11b/g  
Choose Network  
Lets you select an available network for the printer to use  
[list of available networks]  
View Signal Quality  
View Security Mode  
Lets you view the quality of the wireless connection  
Lets you view the encryption method that a wireless network uses  
Note: Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a simple and secure configuration that allows you to establish a wireless  
network and enable network security without requiring prior knowledge of Wi‑Fi technology. It is no longer  
necessary to configure the network name (SSID) and WEP key or WPA passphrase for network devices.  
AppleTalk menu  
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk  
Menu item  
Description  
Activate  
Yes  
Activates AppleTalk support  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
No  
View Name  
Shows the assigned AppleTalk name  
Note: The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.  
View Address  
Shows the assigned AppleTalk address  
Note: The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.  
Set Zone  
Provides a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network  
[default]  
Note: When “default” is selected, the printer uses the AppleTalk zone that the  
[list of zones available on the network] router identifies as the default zone for the network. If no default zone exists,  
then the zone marked with an * is the default setting.  
Standard USB menu  
Menu item  
Description  
PCL SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received  
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses  
PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default  
printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to  
Off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding printer menus  
166  
Menu item  
Description  
PS SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received  
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses  
PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer  
language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
NPA Mode  
Auto  
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional  
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol  
On  
Notes:  
Off  
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,  
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.  
USB Buffer  
Sets the size of the USB input buffer  
Auto  
Notes:  
3KB to [maximum size allowed]  
Disabled  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard  
disk are printed before normal processing resumes.  
• The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-KB increments.  
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,  
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or  
Off.  
• To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the  
size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.  
Job Buffering  
Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
Auto  
• On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.  
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another  
input port.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.  
Mac Binary PS  
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs  
Auto  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.  
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
167  
Menu item  
Description  
ENA Address  
Sets the network address information for an external print server  
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy  
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print  
server through the USB port.  
ENA Netmask  
Sets the netmask information for an external print server  
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy  
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print  
server through the USB port.  
ENA Gateway  
Sets the gateway information for an external print server  
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy  
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print  
server through the USB port.  
Parallel [x] menu  
Menu item  
Description  
PCL SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received  
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses  
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer  
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
PS SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received  
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses  
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer  
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
NPA Mode  
Auto  
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional  
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol  
On  
Notes:  
Off  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
168  
Menu item  
Description  
Parallel Buffer  
Sets the size of the parallel input buffer  
Notes:  
Auto  
3KB to [maximum size allowed]  
Disabled  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any print jobs already buffered on the printer  
hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.  
• The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.  
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,  
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or  
Off.  
• To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce  
the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.  
Job Buffering  
Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
Auto  
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.  
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another  
input port.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.  
Advanced Status  
Enables bidirectional communication through the parallel port  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• Off disables parallel port negotiation.  
Protocol  
Fastbytes  
Standard  
Specifies the parallel port protocol  
Notes:  
• Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most  
existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.  
• Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.  
Honor Init  
Off  
Determines if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the  
computer  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the  
parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the  
computer is turned on.  
Parallel Mode 2  
Determines if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a  
strobe  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
169  
Menu item  
Description  
Mac Binary PS  
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs  
Auto  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.  
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.  
ENA Address  
Sets the network address information for an external print server  
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy  
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print  
server through the USB port.  
ENA Netmask  
Sets the netmask information for an external print server  
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy  
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print  
server through the USB port.  
ENA gateway  
Sets the gateway information for an external print server  
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy  
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print  
server through the USB port.  
Serial [x] menu  
Menu item  
Description  
PCL SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received  
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses  
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer  
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
PS SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received  
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses  
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer  
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
170  
Menu item  
Description  
NPA Mode  
Auto  
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional  
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol  
On  
Notes:  
Off  
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,  
determine the format, and then processes it appropriately.  
• When set to On, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in NPA  
format, it is rejected as bad data.  
• When set to Off, the printer does not perform NPA processing.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.  
Serial Buffer  
Sets the size of the serial input buffer  
Auto  
Notes:  
3KB to [maximum size allowed]  
Disabled  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are  
printed before normal processing is resumed.  
• The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.  
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,  
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or  
Off.  
• To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce  
the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.  
Job Buffering  
Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting. The printer does not buffer print jobs on the  
printer hard disk.  
Auto  
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.  
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another  
input port.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.  
Protocol  
Selects the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port  
DTR  
DTR/DSR  
Notes:  
• DTR is the factory default setting.  
• DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.  
• XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.  
XON/XOFF  
XON/XOFF/DTR  
XONXOFF/DTRDSR  
• XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and  
software handshaking settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
171  
Menu item  
Description  
Robust XON  
Determines whether the printer communicates availability to the computer  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to  
XON/XOFF.  
Baud  
Specifies the rate at which data can be received through the serial port  
9600  
Notes:  
19200  
38400  
57600  
115200  
138200  
172800  
230400  
345600  
1200  
• 9600 is the factory default setting.  
• 138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the  
Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1,  
Serial Option 2, or Serial Option 3 menus.  
2400  
4800  
Data Bits  
Specifies the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame  
8
7
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.  
Parity  
None  
Ignore  
Even  
Sets the parity for serial input and output data frames  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
Odd  
Honor DSR  
Determines whether the printer uses the DSR Signal  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables. The serial port uses  
DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical  
noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray characters to  
print. Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing.  
SMTP Setup menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Primary SMTP Gateway  
Primary SMTP Gateway Port  
Secondary SMTP Gateway  
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port  
Specifies SMTP server gateway and port information  
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
172  
Menu item  
Description  
SMTP Timeout  
Specifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to  
send an e‑mail  
5–30  
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.  
Reply Address  
Specifies a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the  
printer  
Use SSL  
Sets the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the  
SMTP server  
Disabled  
Negotiate  
Required  
Notes:  
• Disabled is the factory default setting.  
• When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if  
SSL will be used.  
SMTP Server Authentication  
No authentication required  
Login/Plain  
Specifies the type of user authentication required for scan to e‑mail  
privileges  
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.  
CRAM‑MD5  
Digest‑MD5  
NTLM  
Kerberos 5  
Device‑Initiated E‑mail  
None  
Specifies what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP  
server. Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e-mail.  
Use Device SMTP Credentials  
Notes:  
User‑Initiated E‑mail  
None  
• None is the factory default setting for Device and User‑Initiated  
E‑mail.  
Use Device SMTP Credentials  
Use Session User ID & Password  
Use Session E‑mail address & Password  
Prompt User  
• Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP  
server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.  
Device Userid  
Device Password  
Kerberos 5 Realm  
NTLM Domain  
Security menu  
Editing Security Setups menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Creates a backup password  
Edit Backup Password  
Note: This menu item will only appear if a backup password exists.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding printer menus  
173  
Menu item  
Description  
Edit Building Blocks  
Edit Security Templates  
Edit Access Controls  
Edits the Internal Accounts, NTLM, various Setups, Password, and PIN  
Adds or edits a Security Template  
Controls access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access  
points  
Miscellaneous Security Settings menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Login Restrictions  
Login failures  
Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control  
panel before all users are locked out  
Failure time frame  
Lockout time  
Panel Login Timeout  
Remote Login Timeout  
Notes:  
• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are  
locked out. Settings range from 1–10 attempts is the factory default setting.  
• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login  
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1–60  
minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.  
• “Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the  
login failures limit. Settings range from 1–60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory  
default setting. 1indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.  
• “Panel Login Timeout” specifies how long the printer remains idle on the  
Home screen before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1–  
900 seconds. 30 seconds is the factory default setting.  
• “Remote Login Timeout” specifies how long a remote interface remains idle  
before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1–120 seconds.  
10 minutes is the factory default setting.  
Security Reset Jumper  
Access controls=”No Security”  
No Effect  
Changes the value of the security settings  
Notes:  
• Access controls=”No Security” retains all the security information that the user  
has defined. “No Security" is the factory default setting.  
Reset factory security defaults  
• “No Effect” means the reset has no effect on the device’s security  
configuration.  
• “Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the user  
has defined, and assigns the factory default value to each setting in the  
Miscellaneous Security Settings section of both the panel and the Web page.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
174  
Menu item  
Description  
LDAP Certificate Verification  
Allows the user to request a server certificate  
Demand  
Try  
Allow  
Never  
Notes:  
• “Demand” means a server certificate is requested. If a bad certificate is  
provided or if no certificate is provided, the session is terminated immediately.  
“Demand” is the factory default setting.  
• “Try” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, the  
session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, the session is  
terminated immediately.  
• “Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided,  
the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, it will be  
ignored and the session proceeds normally.  
• “Never” means no server certificate is requested.  
Minimum PIN Length  
Limits the digit length of the PIN.  
1–16  
Note: 4 is the is the factory default setting.  
Confidential Print menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Max Invalid PIN  
Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered  
Off  
2–10  
Notes:  
• This menu appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.  
• Once the limit is reached, the print job for that user name and that PIN are deleted.  
Confidential Job Expiration Limits the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is deleted  
Off  
1 hour  
Notes:  
• If the Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential print jobs reside on the  
4 hours  
24 hours  
1 week  
printer RAM or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those print jobs does not  
change to the new default value.  
• If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in printer RAM are deleted.  
Repeat Job Expiration  
Sets a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs  
Off  
1 hour  
4 hours  
24 hours  
1 week  
Verify Job Expiration  
Off  
Sets a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification  
1 hour  
4 hours  
24 hours  
1 week  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
175  
Menu item  
Description  
Sets a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time  
Reserve Job Expiration  
Off  
1 hour  
4 hours  
24 hours  
1 week  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Disk Wiping menu  
Disk Wiping erases only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system. All  
permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.  
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.  
Menu item  
Description  
Wiping Mode  
Auto  
Specifies the mode for disk wiping  
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer determines when to initiate a  
Manual  
Off  
disk wipe.  
Scheduled Wiping  
Sets the schedule for disk wiping  
Time  
Day  
Notes:  
• Time is used to set the time for scheduled wiping.  
• Day is used to set the specific day or period for scheduled wiping. Values are  
Sunday to Friday, Everyday, Weekdays, and Weekends.  
• Scheduled wipes are initiated without displaying a user warning or  
confirmation message.  
• Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk  
space without first having to wipe it.  
Manual Wiping  
Do not start now  
Start now  
Overwrites all disk space that has been used to hold data from a print job that has  
been processed (printed). This type of wipe does not erase any information related  
to an unprocessed print job.  
Notes:  
• “Do not start now “is the factory default setting.  
• If the Disk Wiping access control is activated, then a user must successfully  
authenticate and have the required authorization in order to initiate the disk  
wipe.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
176  
Menu item  
Description  
Automatic Method  
Single pass  
Marks all disk space used by a previous print job and does not permit the file system  
to reuse this space until it has been cleared  
Multiple pass  
Notes:  
• “Single pass” is the factory default setting.  
• Only automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to  
turn the printer off for an extended amount of time.  
• Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass  
method.  
Manual Method  
Single pass  
Allows the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first  
Notes:  
Multiple pass  
• “Single pass” is the factory default setting.  
• Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple pass  
method only.  
Scheduled Method  
Single pass  
Allows the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first  
Note: “Single pass” is the factory default setting.  
Multiple pass  
Security Audit Log menu  
Menu item  
Export Log  
Description  
Enables an authorized user to export the security log  
Notes:  
• To export the log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be  
attached to the printer.  
• From the Embedded Web Server, the log can be downloaded to a computer.  
Delete Log  
Yes  
Specifies whether audit logs are deleted  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
No  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
177  
Menu item  
Description  
Configure Log  
Specifies whether and how the audit logs are created  
Enable Audit  
Note: Factory default settings enable the security audit log.  
Enable Remote Syslog  
Remote Syslog Server  
Remote Syslog Port  
Remote Syslog Method  
Remote Syslog Facility  
Log full behavior  
Admin’s e-mail address  
Digitally sign exports  
Severity of events to log  
Remote Syslog non-logged  
events  
E-mail log cleared alert  
E-mail log wrapped alert  
E-mail % full alert  
% full alert level  
E-mail log exported alert  
E-mail log settings changed alert  
Log line endings  
Set Date and Time menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Current Date and Time  
Manually Set Date and Time  
Time Zone  
Lets you view the current date and time settings for the printer  
Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.  
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.  
Automatically Observe DST  
Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time  
associated with the Time Zone setting.  
On  
Off  
Custom Time Zone Setup  
DST Start Week  
DST Start DayOff  
DST Start Month  
DST Start Time  
DST End Week  
DST End Day  
Enables the user to set up the time zone  
DST End Month  
DST End Time  
DST Offset  
Enable NTP  
Enables Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a  
network  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
178  
Menu item  
NTP Server  
Description  
Lets you view the NTP Server Address  
Enable Authentication  
Lets you change the authentication setting to on or off  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Settings menu  
General Settings menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Display Language  
English  
Sets the language of the text appearing on the display  
Note: Some languages may not be available for all printers.  
Francais  
Deutsch  
Italiano  
Espanol  
Dansk  
Norsk  
Nederlands  
Svenska  
Portuguese  
Suomi  
Russian  
Polski  
Greek  
Magyar  
Turkce  
Cesky  
Simplified Chinese  
Traditional Chinese  
Korean  
Japanese  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding printer menus  
179  
Menu item  
Description  
Eco-Mode  
Off  
Minimizes the use of energy, paper, or specialty media  
Notes:  
Energy  
Energy/Paper  
Paper  
• Off is the factory default setting. Off resets the printer to  
its factory default settings.  
• Energy minimizes the power used by the printer.  
Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.  
• Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power, and of paper  
and specialty media.  
• Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty  
media needed for a print job. Performance may be  
affected, but print quality is not.  
ADF Loaded Beep  
Enabled  
Specifies whether theADF sounds a beep when paper is loaded  
Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.  
Disabled  
Quiet Mode  
Reduces the amount of noise produced by the printer  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting. This setting supports  
the performance specifications of your printer.  
• On configures the printer to produce as little noise as  
possible. This setting is best suited for printing text and  
line art.  
• For optimal printing of color‑rich documents, set Quiet  
Mode to Off.  
• Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable  
Quiet Mode. This setting will provide better print quality  
and full speed printing.  
Run Initial setup  
Instructs the printer to run the setup wizard  
Yes  
No  
Notes:  
• Yes is the factory default setting.  
• After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at  
the country or region selection screen, the default  
becomes No.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
180  
Menu item  
Description  
Keyboard  
Keyboard Type  
English  
Specifies a language for the printer control panel virtual  
keyboard  
Francais  
Francais Canadien  
Deutsch  
Italiano  
Espanol  
Greek  
Dansk  
Norsk  
Nederlands  
Svenska  
Suomi  
Portuguese  
Russian  
Polski  
Swiss German  
Swiss French  
Korean  
Magyar  
Turkish  
Czech  
Simplified Chinese  
Traditional Chinese  
Japanese  
Custom Key [x]  
Paper Sizes  
US  
Specifies the default paper measurements  
Notes:  
Metric  
• Initial setting is determined by your country or region  
selection in the initial setup wizard.  
• Changing this setting also changes the default for each  
input source in the Paper Size/Type menu.  
Scan to PC Port Range  
Specifies a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking  
firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers  
separated by a semicolon.  
[port range]  
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
181  
Menu item  
Description  
Displayed Information  
Left side  
Specifies what is displayed on the upper left and right corners  
of the home screen  
For the Left side and Right side menus, select from the  
following options:  
Right side  
Custom Text [x]  
[x] Toner  
[x] Imaging Unit  
Fuser  
None  
IP Address  
Hostname  
Contact Name  
Location  
Transfer Module  
Date/Time  
mDNS/DDNS Service Name  
Zero Configuration Name  
Custom Text [x]  
Model Name  
For the [x] Toner, [x] Imaging Unit, Fuser, and Transfer Module  
menus, choose from the following options:  
When to display  
Do not display  
Display  
Message to Display  
Default  
Alternate  
Default  
[text entry]  
Alternate  
[text entry]  
Notes:  
• IP Address is the factory default setting for “Left side.”  
• Date/Time is the factory default setting for “Right side.”  
• “Do not display” is the factory default setting for “When  
to display.”  
• Default is the factory default setting for Message to  
Display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
182  
Menu item  
Description  
Displayed Information  
Waste Toner Bottle  
Paper Jam  
Specifies what is displayed for Waste Toner Bottle, Paper Jam,  
Load Paper, and Service Errors. Available options for each  
button are:  
Display  
Load Paper  
Service Errors  
No  
Yes  
Message to Display  
Default  
Alternate  
Default  
[text entry]  
Alternate  
[text entry]  
Notes:  
• No is the factory default setting for Display.  
• Default is the factory default setting for Message to  
Display.  
Home screen customization  
Change Language  
Copy  
Lets you add or remove icons and buttons that appear on the  
home screen  
Available selections for each icon or button are:  
Do not display  
Display  
Copy shortcuts  
Fax  
Fax Shortcuts  
E‑mail  
E‑mail Shortcuts  
FTP  
FTP Shortcuts  
Search Held Jobs  
Held Jobs  
USB Drive  
Profiles and Solutions  
Bookmarks  
Jobs by user  
Forms and Favorites  
Date Format  
MM‑DD‑YYYY  
DD‑MM‑YYYY  
YYYY‑MM‑DD  
Specifies the format for the printer date  
Time Format  
Specifies the format for the printer time  
12 hour A.M./P.M.  
24 hour clock  
Note: 12 hour is the factory default setting.  
Screen Brightness  
Specifies the brightness of the printer control panel display  
20–100  
Note: 100 is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
183  
Menu item  
Description  
One Page Copy  
Sets copying from the scanner glass to only one page at a time  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Audio Feedback  
Sets the audio volume for the buttons  
Button Feedback  
Notes:  
On  
Off  
• On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.  
• 5 is the factory default setting for Volume.  
Volume  
1–10  
Tactile Touchscreen Feedback  
Provides touch screen sensation feedback  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Show Bookmarks  
Specifies whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs  
area  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
Allow Background Removal  
Specifies whether image background is removed in copy, fax,  
e‑mail, FTP, or scan‑to‑USB jobs  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
On  
Off  
Allow Custom Job Scans  
Lets you scan multiple documents into one file  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, the  
Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific  
jobs.  
Scanner Jam Recovery  
Job level  
Specifies how a scan job should be reloaded if a paper jam  
occurs in the ADF  
Page level  
Notes:  
• If “Job level” is selected, then the entire scan job must  
be scanned again if a paper jam occurs.  
• If “Page level” is selected, then only the jammed page  
forward must be scanned again.  
Web Page Refresh Rate  
Specifies the number of seconds between Embedded Web  
Server refreshes  
30–300  
Note: 120 seconds is the factory default setting.  
Contact Name  
Location  
Specifies a contact name for the printer  
Note: The contact name will be stored on the Embedded  
Web Server.  
Specifies the location of the printer  
Note: The location will be stored on the Embedded Web  
Server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
184  
Menu item  
Description  
Alarms  
Sets an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator  
intervention  
Alarm Control  
Cartridge Alarm  
Available options for each alarm type are:  
Single  
Continuous  
Off  
Notes:  
• Single is the factory default setting. Single sounds three  
quick beeps.  
• Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.  
• Off means no alarm will sound.  
Timeouts  
Standby Mode  
1–240  
Specifiesthenumberofminutesofinactivitybeforethesystem  
enters a lower power state  
Note: 15 minutes is the factory default setting.  
Disabled  
Timeouts  
Sleep Mode  
Disabled  
Sets the amount of time the printer waits, after a print job is  
finished, before it goes into a reduced power state  
Notes:  
1–240 min  
• 5 minutes is the factory default setting.  
• Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require  
longer warm‑up times.  
• Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an  
electrical circuit with room lighting.  
• Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use.  
Under most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready  
to print with minimum warm‑up time.  
Timeouts  
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before  
the printer displays Ready  
Screen Timeout  
15–300 sec  
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.  
Timeouts  
Print Timeout  
Disabled  
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive  
an end‑of‑job message before canceling the remainder of the  
print job  
1–255 sec  
Notes:  
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.  
• When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in  
the printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see  
if any new print jobs are waiting.  
• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL  
emulation. This setting has no effect on PostScript  
emulation print jobs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
185  
Menu item  
Description  
Timeouts  
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for  
additional data before canceling a print job  
Wait Timeout  
Disabled  
Notes:  
15–65535 sec  
• 40 seconds is the factory default setting.  
• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using  
PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL  
emulation print jobs.  
Timeouts  
Sets the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention  
before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and  
continues to process print jobs in the print queue  
Job Hold Timeout  
5–255 sec  
Notes:  
• 30 seconds is the factory default setting.  
• This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is  
installed.  
Print Recovery  
Auto Continue  
Disabled  
Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain  
offline situations when not resolved within the specified time  
period  
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.  
5–255  
Print Recovery  
Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pages  
Jam Recovery  
Notes:  
Auto  
On  
• Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints  
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the  
pages is needed for other printer tasks.  
Off  
• On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.  
• Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.  
Print Recovery  
Page Protect  
Off  
Lets the printer successfully print a page that may not have  
printed otherwise  
Notes:  
On  
• Off is the factory default setting. Off prints a partial page  
when there is not enough memory to print the whole  
page.  
• On sets the printer to process the whole page so that  
the entire page prints.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
186  
Menu item  
Description  
Press Sleep Button  
Sleep  
Determines how the printer responds when pressing the Sleep  
button in Idle state  
Hibernate  
Notes:  
Do Nothing  
• Sleep is the factory default setting for Press Sleep  
Button.  
• Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower  
power configuration.  
• If the printer is in Sleep Mode, then the touch screen  
appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color.  
• Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button  
on the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode.  
• If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the touch  
screen is completely off and the Sleep button turns  
amber in color and blinks.  
Press and Hold Sleep Button  
Do Nothing  
Determines how the printer responds when pressing the Sleep  
button when the printer is idle  
Sleep  
Notes:  
Hibernate  
• Do Nothing is the factory default setting.  
• Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower  
power configuration.  
• If the printer is in Sleep Mode, then the touch screen  
appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color.  
• Press and hold the Sleep button for 3 seconds or longer  
to enter Hibernate mode.  
• Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button  
on the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode.  
Factory Defaults  
Do Not Restore  
Restore Now  
Returns the printer settings to the factory default settings  
Notes:  
• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. It keeps  
the user‑defined settings.  
• Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory  
default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All  
downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads  
stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not  
affected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
187  
Copy Settings menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Content Type  
Text/Photo  
Photo  
Specifies the content of the original document  
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.  
Text  
Graphics  
Content Source  
Color Laser  
Inkjet  
Specifies how the original document was produced  
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.  
Photo/Film  
Magazine  
Newspaper  
Press  
Other  
Black and White Laser  
Color  
On  
Specifies whether or not copies are printed in color  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Off  
Allow color copies  
Lets you enable or disable color in copying  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• Off will hide all color‑specific menus.  
• This setting overrides the Color setting.  
Sides (Duplex)  
Specifies whether an original document is duplex (two‑sided) or simplex (one-sided),  
and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplex  
1 sided to 1 sided  
1 sided to 2 sided  
2 sided to 1 sided  
2 sided to 2 sided  
Notes:  
• 1 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on one side and the copied  
page will also have printing on one side.  
• 1 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on one side while the copied  
page will have printing on both sides. For example, if the original document is  
six sheets, the copy is three sheets with printing on both sides.  
• 2 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on both sides while the  
copied page will have printing on only one side. For example, if the original  
document is three sheets with an image on each side of each sheet, then the  
copy is six sheets with only one image on one side of each sheet.  
• 2 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on both sides and the copy  
mimics the original exactly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
188  
Menu item  
Description  
Paper Saver  
Off  
Allows copying two or four sheets of a document on one page  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
2 on 1 Portrait  
2 on 1 Landscape  
4 on 1 Portrait  
4 on 1 Landscape  
Print Page Borders  
Specifies whether or not a border is printed on the page  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Collate  
Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies  
On [1,2,1,2,1,2]  
Off [1,1,1,2,2,2]  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Original Size  
Letter  
Specifies the paper size of the original document  
Notes:  
Legal  
Executive  
Tabloid  
• Letter is the US factory default setting.  
• A4 is the international factory default setting.  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
4 x 6 in.  
3 x 5 in.  
Business Card  
ID Card  
Custom Scan Size [x]  
A3  
A4  
A5  
Oficio (Mexico)  
A6  
JIS B4  
JIS B5  
Book Original  
Auto Size Sense  
Mixed Sizes  
Copy To Source  
Tray [x]  
Specifies the paper source for copy jobs  
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.  
Auto Size Match  
Manual Feeder  
Transparency Separators  
Places a sheet of paper between transparencies  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
189  
Menu item  
Description  
Separator Sheets  
Off  
Places a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Between Copies  
Between Jobs  
Between Pages  
Separator Sheet Source  
Tray [x]  
Specifies the separator sheet source  
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.  
Manual Feeder  
Darkness  
Specifies the level of darkness for the copy job  
1–9  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Number of Copies  
Specifies the number of copies for the copy job  
1–999  
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.  
Header/Footer  
[Location]  
Specifies header/footer information and its location on the page  
For the location, choose from the following options:  
Off  
• Top left  
Date/Time  
Page number  
Custom text  
Print on  
• Top middle  
• Top right  
• Bottom left  
• Bottom middle  
• Bottom right  
All pages  
First page only  
All but first page  
Custom text  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting for [Location].  
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for “Print on.”  
Overlay  
Off  
Specifies the type of overlay printed on each page of the copy job  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Confidential  
Copy  
Draft  
Urgent  
Custom  
Custom Overlay  
Specifies the custom overlay text  
Note: A maximum of 64 characters is allowed.  
Allow priority copies  
Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or document  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Custom Job scanning  
Lets you copy, in a single copy job, a document that contains mixed paper sizes  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• This menu appears only if a valid printer hard drive is installed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
190  
Menu item  
Description  
Allow Save as Shortcut  
Lets you save custom copy settings as shortcuts  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Background Removal  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy  
‑4 to 4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Auto Center  
Lets you automatically center the content on the page  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Color Balance  
Cyan - Red  
Enables an equal balance of colors in the output  
Magenta - Green  
Yellow - Blue  
Color Dropout  
Specifies which color to drop during copies, and how much to increase or decrease  
the dropout  
Color Dropout  
None  
Notes:  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.  
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.  
Default Red Threshold  
0–255  
Default Green Threshold  
0–255  
Default Blue Threshold  
0–255  
Contrast  
Best for content  
0–5  
Specifies the contrast used for the copy job  
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.  
Mirror Image  
Creates a mirror image of the original document  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Negative Image  
Creates a negative image of the original document  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Shadow Detail  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy  
‑4 to 4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
ADF Skew Fix  
Corrects slight skew in the scanned image  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting  
Scan edge to edge  
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
191  
Menu item  
Description  
Sharpness  
Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a copy  
1–5  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Temperature  
Enables the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer  
output than the default, while “warm” values generate a redder output than the  
default.  
‑4 to 4  
Sample Copy  
Creates a sample copy of the original document  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Fax Settings menu  
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu  
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job by way of a telephone line.  
General Fax Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Fax Name or Station Name  
Fax Number or Station Number  
Specifies the name of the fax in the printer  
Specifies the number assigned to the fax  
Specifies how the fax is identified  
Station ID  
Fax Name or Station Name  
Fax Number or Station Number  
Enable Manual Fax  
Sets the printer to fax manually only, which requires a line splitter and a telephone  
handset  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax  
number.  
• Touch #, and then 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax  
function.  
Memory Use  
Equal  
Defines the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs  
Notes:  
Mostly sent  
All send  
All receive  
Mostly receive  
• Equal is the factory default setting. Equal splits the memory for sending and  
receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.  
• Mostly sent specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.  
• All send specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.  
• All receive specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.  
• Mostly receive specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.  
Cancel Faxes  
Allow  
Specifies whether or not the printer cancels fax jobs  
Don't Allow  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding printer menus  
192  
Menu item  
Description  
Caller ID  
On  
Specifies type of caller ID being used  
Off  
Alternate  
Fax number masking  
Off  
Specifies the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number  
Note: The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to mask”  
From left  
setting.  
From right  
Digits to mask  
Specifies the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number  
0–58  
Fax Cover Page  
Fax Cover Page  
Off by default  
On by default  
Never use  
Always use  
Include to field  
On  
Configures the fax cover page  
Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options.  
Off  
Include from field  
Off  
On  
From  
Include Message field  
Off  
On  
Message  
Include Logo  
Off  
On  
Include Footer [x]  
Footer [x]  
Fax Send Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Resolution  
Specifies quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives greater print quality,  
but increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.  
Standard  
Fine 200 dpi  
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.  
Super Fine 300 dpi  
Ultra Fine 600 dpi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
193  
Menu item  
Description  
Original Size  
Mixed Sizes  
Letter  
Specifies the paper size of the original document  
Note: Mixed Sizes is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
default setting.  
Legal  
Executive  
Tabloid  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
4 x 6 in.  
3 x 5 in.  
Business Card  
Custom Scan Size [x]  
A3  
A4  
A5  
Oficio (Mexico)  
A6  
JIS B4  
JIS B5  
Book Original  
Auto Size Sense  
Mixed Sizes  
Sides (Duplex)  
Off  
Specifies how text and graphics are oriented on a page  
Notes:  
Long edge  
Short edge  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for  
portrait and top edge for landscape).  
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for  
portrait and left edge for landscape).  
Content Type  
Text  
Specifies the content of the original document  
Note: Text is the factory default setting.  
Graphics  
Text/Photo  
Photo  
Content Source  
Color Laser  
Inkjet  
Specifies how the original document was produced  
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.  
Photo Film  
Magazine  
Newspaper  
Press  
Other  
Black and White Laser  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
194  
Menu item  
Description  
Darkness  
Lightens or darkens the output  
1–9  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Dial Prefix  
Lets you enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.  
Establishes a dialing prefix rule  
Dialing Prefix Rules  
Prefix Rule [x]  
Automatic Redial  
Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number  
0–9  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Redial Frequency  
Specifies the number of minutes between redials  
1–200  
Behind a PABX  
Enables switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone  
No  
Yes  
Enable ECM  
Enables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs  
Yes  
No  
Enable Fax Scans  
Lets you fax files that are scanned at the printer  
Allows the printer driver to send fax jobs  
On  
Off  
Driver to fax  
Yes  
No  
Allow Save as Shortcut  
Lets you save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer  
Specifies the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse  
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent  
On  
Off  
Dial Mode  
Tone  
Pulse  
Max Speed  
33600  
2400  
4800  
9600  
14400  
Custom Job scanning  
Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file  
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs  
Off  
On  
Scan Preview  
Off  
On  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
195  
Menu item  
Description  
Background Removal  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image  
‑4 to 4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Color Balance  
Cyan - Red  
Enables an equal balance of colors in the scanned image  
Magenta - Green  
Yellow - Blue  
Color Dropout  
Specifies which color to drop, and how much to increase or decrease the dropout  
Color Dropout  
Notes:  
None  
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.  
Red  
Green  
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.  
Blue  
Default Red Threshold  
0–255  
Default Green Threshold  
0–255  
Default Blue Threshold  
0–255  
Contrast  
Best for content  
0–5  
Specifies the contrast in the scanned image  
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
Mirror Image  
Creates a mirror image of the original document  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Negative Image  
Creates a negative image of the original document  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Shadow Detail  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible  
‑4 to 4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
ADF Skew Fix  
Corrects slight skew in the scanned image  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting  
Scan edge to edge  
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge prior to faxing  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Off  
On  
Sharpness  
Adjusts the sharpness of a fax  
0–5  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Temperature  
Enables the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer  
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the  
default.  
‑4 to 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
196  
Menu item  
Description  
Enable Color Fax Scans  
Off by default  
On by default  
Never use  
Enables color faxing  
Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting.  
Always use  
Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono Converts all outgoing faxes to black and white  
Faxes  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
On  
Off  
Fax Receive Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Enable Fax Receive  
Allows fax jobs to be received by the printer  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Fax Job Waiting  
None  
Removes fax jobs that request specific unavailable resources from the print queue  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
Toner  
Toner and Supplies  
Rings to Answer  
Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job  
1–25  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Auto Reduction  
Scales an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated  
fax source  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Paper Source  
Auto  
Specifiesthepapersourceselectedtosupplypaperfortheprinterto printanincoming  
fax  
Tray [x]  
Multi‑Purpose Feeder  
Sides (Duplex)  
Enables duplex printing (two-sided printing) for incoming fax jobs  
Enables the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs  
Off  
On  
Separator Sheets  
Off  
Before Job  
After Job  
Separator Sheet Source  
Tray [x]  
Specifies where the printer will pick the separator sheet  
Manual Feeder  
Fax Footer  
Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
197  
Menu item  
Description  
Max Speed  
33600  
2400  
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received  
4800  
9600  
14400  
Fax Forwarding  
Print  
Enables forwarding of received faxes to another recipient  
Print and Forward  
Forward  
Forward to  
Fax  
Specifies the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded  
Note: This menu is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.  
E‑mail  
FTP  
LDSS  
eSF  
Forward to Shortcut  
Lets you enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail,  
FTP, LDSS, or eSF)  
Block No Name Fax  
Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified  
Off  
On  
Banned Fax List  
Enables the list of banned fax numbers stored in the printer  
Holding Faxes  
Held Fax Mode  
Off  
Enables fax holding all of the time or according to set schedule  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Always On  
Manual  
Scheduled  
Fax Holding Schedule  
Enable Color Fax Receive  
Enables the device to receive fax in color  
On  
Off  
Fax Log Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Transmission Log  
Print log  
Enables printing of a transmission log after each fax job  
Do not print log  
Print only for error  
Receive Error Log  
Print Never  
Enables printing of a receive error log following a receive error  
Print on Error  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
198  
Menu item  
Description  
Auto Print Logs  
Enables automatic printing of fax logs  
On  
Off  
Note: Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.  
Log Paper Source  
Tray [x]  
Specifies the source of the paper used for printing logs  
Manual Feeder  
Logs Display  
Specifieswhetherprintedlogsdisplaythe dialednumberor thestationnamereturned  
Remote Fax Name or Remote  
Station Name  
Dialed Number  
Enable Job Log  
Enables access to the Fax Job log  
Enables access to the Fax Call log  
On  
Off  
Enable Call Log  
On  
Off  
Speaker Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Speaker Mode  
On until Connected  
Always On  
Specifies the mode of the speaker.  
Notes:  
• “On until Connected” is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the  
fax connection is made.  
Always Off  
• Always On turns the speaker on.  
• Always Off turns the speaker off.  
Speaker Volume  
Controls the volume setting  
High  
Low  
Note: High is the factory default setting.  
Ringer Volume  
Controls the fax speaker ringer volume  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Answer On  
Menu item  
Description  
All Rings  
Specifies ring patterns when device is answering calls  
Single Ring Only  
Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.  
Double Ring Only  
Triple Ring Only  
Single or Double Rings Only  
Single or Triple Rings Only  
Double or Triple Rings Only  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
199  
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) menu  
Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.  
Fax Server Setup  
Menu item  
Description  
To Format  
Lets you enter the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer touch screen  
Reply Address  
Subject  
Message  
SMTP Setup  
Specifies SMTP setup information  
Primary SMTP Gateway  
Secondary SMTP Gateway  
Specifies SMTP server port information  
Image Format  
PDF (.pdf)  
XPS (.xps)  
Specifies the image type for scan to fax  
TIFF (.tif)  
Content Type  
Text  
Specifies the content of the original document  
Note: Text is the factory default setting.  
Text/Photo  
Graphics  
Photo  
Content Source  
Color Laser  
Inkjet  
Specifies how the original document was produced  
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.  
Photo/Film  
Magazine  
Newspaper  
Press  
Other  
Fax Resolution  
Standard  
Specifies the resolution level for scan to fax  
Fine 200 dpi  
Super Fine 300 dpi  
Ultra Fine 600 dpi  
Darkness  
Lightens or darkens the output  
1–9  
Note: 5 factory default setting.  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image  
Landscape  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
200  
Menu item  
Description  
Original Size  
Letter  
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default  
Legal  
setting.  
Executive  
Tabloid  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
4 x 6 in.  
3 x 5 in.  
Business Card  
Custom Scan Size [x]  
A3  
A4  
A5  
Oficio (Mexico)  
JIS B4  
JIS B5  
Book Original  
Auto Size Sense  
Mixed Sizes  
Use Multi‑Page TIFF  
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a  
multiple-page scan to fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,  
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
Enable Analog Receive  
Enables analog fax receive  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
E‑mail Settings menu  
Menu item  
Description  
E‑mail Server Setup  
Subject  
Specifies e‑mail server information  
Notes:  
Message  
Base file name  
• The subject is limited to 255 characters.  
• The message is limited 512 characters.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
201  
Menu item  
Description  
E‑mail Server Setup  
Send me a copy  
Never appears  
On by default  
Off by default  
Always On  
Sends a copy of the e-mail back to the sender  
Note: “Never appears” is the factory default setting.  
E‑mail Server Setup  
Max E‑mail size  
0–65535 KB  
Specifies the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes  
Note: E-mails above the specified size are not sent.  
E‑mail Server Setup  
Sends a message when an e-mail is larger than the configured size limit  
Size error message  
E‑mail Server Setup  
Specifies a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limits e‑mail  
destinations to that domain name only  
Limit destinations  
Notes:  
• E-mail can be sent only to the specified domain.  
• The limit is one domain.  
E‑mail Server Setup  
Web Link Setup  
Server  
Defines the e‑mail server path name; for example: /directory/path  
Note: The characters * : ? < > |are invalid entries for a path name.  
Login  
Password  
Path  
Base file name  
Web Link  
Format  
Specifies the format of the scanned file  
PDF (.pdf)  
Secure PDF  
TIFF (.tif)  
JPEG (.jpg)  
XPS (.xps)  
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.  
PDF Version  
1.2–1.6  
Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned for e‑mailing  
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.  
A–1a  
Content Type  
Text/Photo  
Photo  
Specifies the content of the original document  
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.  
Text  
Graphics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
202  
Menu item  
Description  
Content Source  
Color Laser  
Inkjet  
Specifies how the original document is produced  
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.  
Photo/Film  
Magazine  
Newspaper  
Press  
Other  
Black/White Laser  
Color  
On  
Specifies whether or not copies are printed in color  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Off  
Resolution  
150 dpi  
200 dpi  
300 dpi  
400 dpi  
600 dpi  
75 dpi  
Specifies the resolution of the scan in dots per inch  
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.  
Darkness  
Lightens or darkens the output  
1–9  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
203  
Menu item  
Description  
Original Size  
Letter  
Specifies the paper size of the original document  
Notes:  
Legal  
Executive  
Tabloid  
• A4 is the international factory default setting.  
• Letter is the US factory default setting.  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
4 x 6 in.  
3 x 5 in.  
Business Card  
Custom Scan Size [x]  
A3  
A4  
A5  
Oficio (Mexico)  
A6  
JIS B4  
JIS B5  
Book Original  
Auto Size Sense  
Mixed Sizes  
Sides (Duplex)  
Off  
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page  
Notes:  
Long edge  
Short edge  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for  
portrait and top edge for landscape ).  
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for  
portrait and left edge for landscape ).  
JPEG Quality  
Best for content  
5–90  
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image  
Notes:  
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
• 5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.  
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.  
• This menu setting applies to all scan functions.  
Text Default  
Sets the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image  
5–90  
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.  
Text/Photo Default  
Sets the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the  
image  
5–90  
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.  
Photo Default  
Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image  
5–90  
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
204  
Menu item  
Description  
E‑mail images sent as  
Attachment  
Specifies how the images will be sent  
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.  
Web Link  
Use Multi‑Page TIFF  
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a  
multiple-page scan‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the  
pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• This menu setting applies to all scan functions.  
Transmission Log  
Print log  
Specifies whether or not the transmission log prints  
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.  
Do not print log  
Print only for error  
Log Paper Source  
Tray [x]  
Specifies the paper source for printing e-mail logs  
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.  
Manual Feeder  
E‑mail Bit Depth  
Enables the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when  
Color is set to Off  
8 bit  
1 bit  
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.  
Custom Job scanning  
Lets you copy, in a single copy job, a document that contains mixed paper sizes  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Scan Preview  
Specifies whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Allow Save as Shortcut  
Lets you save e-mail addresses as shortcuts  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When set to Off, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the e-mail  
Destination screen.  
Background Removal  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image  
‑4 to 4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Color Balance  
Cyan - Red  
Enables an equal balance of colors in the output  
Magenta - Green  
Yellow - Blue  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
205  
Menu item  
Description  
Color Dropout  
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease  
the dropout  
Color Dropout  
None  
Notes:  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.  
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.  
Default Red Threshold  
0–255  
Default Green Threshold  
0–255  
Default Blue Threshold  
0–255  
Contrast  
Best for content  
0–5  
Specifies the contrast of the output  
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
Mirror Image  
Creates a mirror image of the original document  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Negative Image  
Creates a negative image of the original document  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Shadow Detail  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image  
‑4 to 4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
ADF Skew Fix  
Corrects slight skew in the scanned image  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting  
Scan edge to edge  
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Sharpness  
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image  
1–5  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Temperature  
Enables the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer  
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the  
default.  
‑4 to 4  
Use cc:/bcc:  
Enables the use of the cc: and bcc: fields  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
206  
FTP Settings menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Format  
Specifies the format of the FTP file  
PDF (.pdf)  
Secure PDF (.pdf)  
TIFF (.tif)  
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.  
JPEG (.jpg)  
XPS (.xps)  
PDF Version  
1.2–1.6  
Sets the version level of the PDF file for FTP  
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.  
A–1a  
Content Type  
Text/Photo  
Photo  
Specifies the content of the original document  
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.  
Text  
Graphics  
Content Source  
Color Laser  
Inkjet  
Specifies how the original document was produced  
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.  
Photo/Film  
Magazine  
Newspaper  
Press  
Other  
Black and White Laser  
Color  
On  
Specifies whether or not copies are printed in color  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Off  
Resolution  
150 dpi  
200 dpi  
300 dpi  
400 dpi  
600 dpi  
75 dpi  
Specifies the quality of scanned images in dots per inch (dpi).  
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.  
Darkness  
Lightens or darkens the output  
1–9  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
207  
Menu item  
Description  
Original Size  
Letter  
Specifies the paper size of the original document  
Notes:  
Legal  
Executive  
Tabloid  
• A4 is the international factory default setting.  
• Letter is the US factory default setting.  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
4 x 6 in.  
3 x 5 in.  
Business Card  
Custom Scan Size [x]  
A3  
A4  
A5  
Oficio (Mexico)  
A6  
JIS B4  
JIS B5  
Book Original  
Auto Size Sense  
Mixed Sizes  
Sides (Duplex)  
Off  
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page  
Notes:  
Long edge  
Short edge  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for  
portrait and top edge for landscape ).  
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for  
portrait and left edge for landscape ).  
JPEG Quality  
Best for content  
5–90  
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the  
image  
Notes:  
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.  
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.  
• This menu setting applies to all scan functions.  
Text Default  
Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image  
5–90  
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.  
Text/Photo Default  
Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the  
image  
5–90  
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
208  
Menu item  
Description  
Photo Default  
Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image  
5–90  
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.  
Use Multi‑Page TIFF  
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a  
multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,  
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• This menu setting applies to all scan functions.  
Transmission Log  
Print log  
Specifies whether the transmission log prints  
Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.  
Do not print log  
Print only for error  
Log Paper Source  
Tray [x]  
Specifies a paper source when printing FTP logs  
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.  
Manual Feeder  
FTP bit Depth  
8 bit  
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when  
Color is set to Off  
1 bit  
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.  
Base File Name  
Lets you enter a base file name  
Note: The limitation is 53 characters.  
Custom Job Scanning  
Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Scan Preview  
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Allow Save as Shortcut  
Enables shortcut creation for FTP addresses  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Background Removal  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy  
‑4 to 4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Color Balance  
Cyan - Red  
Enables an equal balance of colors in the output  
Magenta - Green  
Yellow - Blue  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
209  
Menu item  
Description  
Color Dropout  
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease  
the dropout  
Color Dropout  
None  
Notes:  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.  
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.  
Default Red Threshold  
0–255  
Default Green Threshold  
0–255  
Default Blue Threshold  
0–255  
Contrast  
0–5  
Specifies the contrast of the output  
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
Best for content  
Mirror Image  
Creates a mirror image of the original document  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Negative Image  
Creates a negative image of the original document  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Shadow Detail  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image  
‑4 to 4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
ADF Skew Fix  
Corrects slight skew in the scanned image  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting  
Scan edge to edge  
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Sharpness  
Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a scanned image  
1–5  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Temperature  
Enables the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer  
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the  
default.  
‑4 to 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
210  
Flash Drive menu  
Scan Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Format  
Specifies the format of the file to be sent through FTP  
PDF (.pdf)  
Secure PDF  
TIFF (.tif)  
JPEG (.jpg)  
XPS (.xps)  
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.  
PDF Version  
1.2–1.6  
A‑1a  
Sets the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP  
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.  
Content Type  
Text/Photo  
Photo  
Specifies the content of the original document  
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.  
Text  
Graphics  
Content Source  
Color Laser  
Inkjet  
Specifies how the original document was produced  
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.  
Photo/Film  
Magazine  
Newspaper  
Press  
Other  
Black and White Laser  
Color  
On  
Specifies whether or not copies are printed in color  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Off  
Resolution  
150 dpi  
200 dpi  
300 dpi  
400 dpi  
600 dpi  
75 dpi  
Specifies the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi)  
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.  
Darkness  
Lightens or darkens the output  
1–9  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
211  
Menu item  
Description  
Original Size  
Letter  
Specifies the paper size of the document  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
Legal  
default setting.  
Executive  
Tabloid  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
4 x 6 in.  
3 x 5 in.  
Business Card  
Custom Scan Size [x]  
A3  
A4  
A5  
Oficio (Mexico)  
A6  
JIS B4  
JIS B5  
Book Original  
Auto Size Sense  
Mixed Sizes  
Sides (Duplex)  
Off  
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on a page  
Notes:  
Long edge  
Short edge  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for  
portrait and top edge for landscape).  
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for  
portrait and left edge for landscape).  
JPEG Quality  
Best for content  
5–90  
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality  
Notes:  
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.  
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.  
• This menu applies to all scan functions.  
Text Default  
Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image  
5–90  
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.  
Text/Photo Default  
Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality  
5–90  
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.  
Photo Default  
Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality  
5–90  
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
212  
Menu item  
Description  
Use Multi‑Page TIFF  
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For  
a multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the  
pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• This menu applies to all scan functions.  
Scan Bit Depth  
8 bit  
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when  
Color is set to Off  
1 bit  
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.  
File Name  
Lets you enter a base file name  
Note: A maximum of 53 characters is allowed.  
Custom Job Scanning  
Lets you copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Scan Preview  
Specifies whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Background Removal  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy  
‑4 to 4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Color Balance  
Cyan - Red  
Enables an equal balance of colors in the scanned image  
Magenta - Green  
Yellow - Blue  
Color Dropout  
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or  
decrease the dropout  
Color Dropout  
None  
Notes:  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.  
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.  
Default Red Threshold  
0–255  
Default Green Threshold  
0–255  
Default Blue Threshold  
0–255  
Contrast  
Best for content  
0–5  
Specifies the contrast of the scanned image  
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
Mirror Image  
Creates a mirror image of the original document  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
213  
Menu item  
Description  
Negative Image  
Creates a negative image of the original document  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Shadow Detail  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image  
‑4 to 4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
ADF Skew Fix  
Specifies whether or not to fix slight skew on the scanned image  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting  
Scan edge to edge  
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Sharpness  
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image  
1–5  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Temperature  
Enables the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a  
bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than  
the default.  
‑4 to 4  
Print Settings  
Copies  
1–999  
Specifies a default number of copies for each print job  
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.  
Paper Source  
Tray [x]  
Sets a default paper source for all print jobs  
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.  
MP Feeder  
Manual Paper  
Manual Envelope  
Color  
Generates color print jobs output  
Color  
Note: Color is the factory default setting.  
Black Only  
Collate  
Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies  
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)  
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Sides (Duplex)  
1 sided  
Specifies whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page  
Note: 1 sided is the factory default setting.  
2 sided  
Duplex Binding  
Long Edge  
Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the page is  
oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page  
Short Edge  
Notes:  
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top  
edge for landscape).  
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and  
left edge for landscape).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
214  
Paper Saver Orientation Specifies the orientation of a multiple‑page document  
Auto  
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape  
Landscape  
Portrait  
Paper Saver  
Off  
Specifies that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a paper  
Notes:  
2‑Up  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
3‑Up  
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.  
4‑Up  
6‑Up  
9‑Up  
12‑Up  
16‑Up  
Paper Saver Border  
Prints a border on each page image  
None  
Solid  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
Paper Saver Ordering  
Horizontal  
Specifies the positioning of multiple‑page images  
Notes:  
Reverse Horizontal  
Reverse Vertical  
Vertical  
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.  
• Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or  
landscape orientation.  
Separator Sheets  
Off  
Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted  
Notes:  
Between Copies  
Between Jobs  
Between Pages  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to  
On. If Collate is set to Off, then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages,  
such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.  
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.  
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is  
useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document for  
notes.  
Separator Sheet Source Specifies the paper source for separator sheets  
Tray [x]  
Manual Feeder  
Notes:  
• Tray 1 is the factory default setting.  
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for the Manual  
Feeder to appear as a menu setting.  
Blank Pages  
Do Not Print  
Print  
Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job  
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
215  
Print Settings  
Setup menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Printer Language  
PS Emulation  
Sets the default printer language  
Notes:  
PCL Emulation  
• PS Emulation is the factory default printer language.  
• Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a  
software program from sending print jobs that use another  
printer language.  
Job Waiting  
Specifies that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they  
require unavailable printer options or custom settings. They are  
storedin aseparateprintqueue,sootherjobsprintnormally. When  
the missing information and/or options are obtained, the stored  
jobs print.  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• This menu appears only when a non-read‑only printer hard  
disk is installed. This requirement ensures that stored jobs  
are not deleted if the printer loses power.  
Print Area  
Normal  
Sets the logical and physical printable area  
Notes:  
Whole Page  
• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to  
print data in the non‑printable area defined by the Normal  
setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.  
• Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the  
non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the  
printer will clip the image at the Normal setting boundary.  
Whole Page only affects pages printed using a PCL 5e  
interpreter. This setting has no effect on pages printed using  
the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.  
Printer Usage  
Max Speed  
Max Yield  
Sets color toner use in printing  
Notes:  
• Max Speed is the default printer setting.  
• The printer driver is capable of overriding this setting  
Black Only Mode  
Sets the printer to print text and graphics using only the black print  
cartridge  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding printer menus  
216  
Menu item  
Description  
Download Target  
Sets the storage location for downloads  
RAM  
Flash  
Disk  
Notes:  
• RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in RAM  
is temporary.  
• Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk  
places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in  
flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the  
printer is turned off.  
• This menu appears only when a flash and/or disk option is  
installed.  
Resource Save  
Specifies how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as  
fonts and macros stored in RAM, when the printer receives a job  
that requires more memory than is available  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting. Off sets the printer to retain  
the downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads are  
deleted in order to process print jobs.  
• On retains the downloads during language changes and  
printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory, then 38  
Memory Fullappears, and downloads are not deleted.  
Print All Order  
Alphabetical  
Oldest First  
Specifies the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed  
when Print All is selected  
Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting. Print jobs always  
appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel.  
Newest First  
Job Accounting menu  
Note: This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed. The printer hard disk  
cannot be read/write‑ or write‑protected.  
Menu item  
Description  
Job Accounting Log  
Determines if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Job Accounting Utilities  
Lets you print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive  
Accounting Log Frequency  
Monthly  
Determines how often a log file is created  
Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.  
Weekly  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
217  
Menu item  
Description  
Log Action at End of Frequency  
None  
Determines how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
E‑mail Current Log  
E‑mail & Delete Current Log  
Post Current Log  
Post & Delete Current Log  
Disk Near Full Level  
Specifies the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near  
Full Action  
1–99  
Off  
Note: 5MB is the factory default setting.  
Disk Near Full Action  
None  
Determines how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full  
Notes:  
E‑mail Current Log  
E‑mail & Delete Current Log  
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log  
Post Current Log  
• None is the factory default setting.  
• The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is  
triggered.  
Post & Delete Current Log  
Post & Delete Oldest Log  
Delete Current Log  
Delete Oldest Log  
Delete All Logs  
Delete All But Current  
Disk Full Action  
Determines how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit  
(100MB)  
None  
E‑mail & Delete Current Log  
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log  
Post & Delete Current Log  
Post & Delete Oldest Log  
Delete Current Log  
Delete Oldest Log  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
Delete All Logs  
Delete All But Current  
URL to Post Logs  
Determines where the printer posts job accounting logs  
E‑mail Address to Send Logs  
Log File Prefix  
Specifies the e‑mail address to which the device sends job accounting logs  
Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log  
file prefix.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
218  
Finishing menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Sides (Duplex)  
1 sided  
Specifies whether duplex (2‑sided) printing is set as the default for all print jobs  
Notes:  
2 sided  
• 1 sided is the factory default setting.  
• You can set 2-sided printing from the software program. For Windows users,  
click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For  
Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the  
print dialog and pop-up menus.  
Duplex Binding  
Long Edge  
Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the  
page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page  
Short Edge  
Notes:  
• Long Edge is the factory default setting.  
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for  
portrait and top edge for landscape).  
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for  
portrait and left edge for landscape).  
Copies  
Specifies a default number of copies for each print job  
1–999  
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.  
Blank Pages  
Do Not Print  
Print  
Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job  
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.  
Collate  
Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies  
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)  
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting. No pages will be collated.  
• The On setting stacks the print job sequentially.  
• Both settings print the entire job the number of times specified by the Copies  
menu setting.  
Separator Sheets  
Off  
Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted  
Notes:  
Between Copies  
Between Jobs  
Between Pages  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if  
Collate is set to On. If Collate is set to Off, then a blank page is inserted  
between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page  
2's.  
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.  
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This  
setting is useful when printing transparencies or inserting blank pages in a  
document for notes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
219  
Menu item  
Description  
Separator Source  
Tray [x]  
Specifies the paper source for separator sheets  
Note: Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.  
Manual Feeder  
Paper Saver  
Off  
Specifies that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper  
Notes:  
2‑Up  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
3‑Up  
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print on each  
page.  
4‑Up  
6‑Up  
9‑Up  
12‑Up  
16‑Up  
Paper Saver Ordering  
Horizontal  
Specifies the positioning of multiple‑page images  
Notes:  
Reverse Horizontal  
Reverse Vertical  
Vertical  
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.  
• Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images are in  
portrait or landscape orientation.  
Paper Saver Orientation  
Auto  
Specifies the orientation of a multiple‑page sheet  
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and  
Landscape  
landscape.  
Portrait  
Paper Saver Border  
Prints a border on each page image  
None  
Solid  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
Quality menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Print Mode  
Color  
Specifies whether images are printed in monochrome grayscale or in color  
Note: Color is the factory default setting.  
Black Only  
Color Correction  
Auto  
Adjusts the color output on the printed page  
Notes:  
Off  
Manual  
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto applies different color conversion tables  
to each object on the printed page.  
• Off turns off color correction.  
• Manual allows customization of the color tables using the settings available from  
the Manual Color menu.  
• Due to the differences in additive and subtractive colors, certain colors that  
appear on computer monitors are impossible to duplicate on the printed page.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
220  
Menu item  
Description  
Print Resolution  
Specifies the printed output resolution  
1200 Image Q  
Toner Darkness  
Lightens or darkens the printed output  
1–5  
Notes:  
• 4 is the factory default setting.  
• Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.  
• If Print Mode is set to Black Only, a setting of 5 increases toner density and  
darkness to all print jobs.  
• If Print Mode is set to Color, a setting of 5 is the same as a setting of 4.  
Enhance Fine Lines  
Enables a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical  
circuit diagrams, and flow charts  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• You can set this option from the software program. For Windows users, click  
File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For  
Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the print  
dialog and pop‑up menus.  
• To set Enhance Fine Lines using the Embedded Web Server, type the network  
printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.  
Color Saver  
Reduces the amount of toner used for graphics and images. The amount of toner used  
for text is not reduced.  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• On overrides Toner Darkness settings.  
RGB Brightness  
Adjusts brightness in color outputs  
‑6 to 6  
Notes:  
• 0 is the factory default setting.  
• ‑6 is the maximum decrease. 6 is the maximum increase.  
• This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used.  
RGB Contrast  
Adjusts contrast in color outputs  
0–5  
Notes:  
• 0 is the factory default setting.  
• This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used.  
RGB Saturation  
Adjusts saturation in color outputs  
0–5  
Notes:  
• 0 is the factory default setting.  
• This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
221  
Menu item  
Description  
Color Balance  
Cyan  
Adjusts color in printed output by increasing or decreasing the amount of toner being  
used for each color  
‑5 to 5  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Magenta  
‑5 to 5  
Yellow  
‑5 to 5  
Black  
‑5 to 5  
Reset Defaults  
Color Samples  
sRGB Display  
sRGB Vivid  
Display—True Black  
Vivid  
Prints sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used in the  
printer  
Notes:  
• Selecting any setting prints the sample.  
• Color samples consist of a series of colored boxes along with the RGB or CMYK  
combination that creates the color observed. These pages can be used to help  
decide which combinations to use to get the desired printed output.  
Off—RGB  
US CMYK  
Euro CMYK  
Vivid CMYK  
Off—CMYK  
• From a browser window, type the IP address of the printer to access a complete  
list of color sample pages from the Embedded Web Server.  
Manual Color  
RGB Image  
Vivid  
Customizes the RGB color conversions  
Notes:  
• sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image. This applies a color  
conversion table to an output that matches the colors displayed on a computer  
monitor.  
sRGB Display  
Display True Black  
sRGB Vivid  
Off  
• sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics. sRGB  
Vivid applies a color table that increases saturation. This is preferred for business  
graphics and text.  
RGB Text  
Vivid  
• Vivid applies a color conversion table that produces brighter, more saturated  
colors.  
sRGB Display  
Display True Black  
sRGB Vivid  
Off  
• Display—True Black applies a color conversion table that uses only black toner for  
neutral gray colors.  
• Off turns off color conversion.  
RGB Graphics  
Vivid  
sRGB Display  
Display True Black  
sRGB Vivid  
Off  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
222  
Menu item  
Description  
Manual Color  
CMYK Image  
US CMYK  
Euro CMYK  
Vivid CMYK  
Off  
Customizes the CMYK color conversions  
Notes:  
• US CMYK is the US factory default setting. US CMYK applies a color conversion  
table that tries to produce output that matches SWOP color output.  
• Euro CMYK is the international factory default setting. Euro CMYK applies a color  
conversion table that tries to produce output that matches EuroScale color  
output.  
CMYK Text  
US CMYK  
Euro CMYK  
Vivid CMYK  
Off  
• Vivid CMYK increases color saturation for the US CMYK color conversion table.  
• Off turns off color conversion.  
CMYK Graphics  
US CMYK  
Euro CMYK  
Vivid CMYK  
Off  
Spot Color Replacement  
Color Adjust  
Provides the capability to assign specific CMYK values to named spot colors  
Initiates a recalibration of color conversion tables and allows the printer to make  
adjustments for color variations in output  
Notes:  
• Adjusting color starts when the menu is selected. Adjustingappears on the  
display until the process is finished.  
• Color variations in output sometimes result from changeable conditions such as  
room temperature and humidity. Color adjustments are made on printer  
algorithms. Color alignment is also recalibrated in this process.  
Utilities menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Remove Held Jobs  
Confidential  
Held  
Removes confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk  
Notes:  
• Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.  
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not  
affected.  
Not Restored  
All  
• Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the  
printer hard disk or memory.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
223  
Menu item  
Description  
Format Flash  
Formats the flash memory  
Yes  
No  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is  
being formatted.  
Notes:  
• Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.  
• No cancels the format request.  
• Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory option  
card in the printer.  
• A flash memory option card must be installed in the printer and operating  
properly for this menu item to be available.  
• The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.  
Delete Downloads on Disk  
Delete Now  
Removes downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs,  
and parked jobs  
Do Not Delete  
Notes:  
• Delete Now configures the printer control panel to return to the originating  
screen after the deletion process is completed.  
• Do Not Delete sets the printer control panel to return to the main Utilities  
menu.  
Activate Hex Trace  
Assists in isolating the source of a print job problem  
Notes:  
• When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and  
character representation, and control codes are not executed.  
• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn the printer off or reset the printer.  
Coverage Estimator  
Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is  
printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
XPS menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Print Error Pages  
Prints a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
PDF menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Scale to Fit  
Scales page content to fit the selected paper size  
No  
Note: No is the factory default setting.  
Yes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding printer menus  
224  
Menu item  
Description  
Annotations  
Do Not Print  
Print  
Prints annotations in a PDF  
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.  
PostScript menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Print PS Error  
Prints a page containing the PostScript error  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Lock PS Startup Mode  
Enables users to disable the SysStart file  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Font Priority  
Resident  
Establishes the font search order  
Notes:  
Flash/Disk  
• Resident is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item is available only if a formatted flash memory option card  
or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.  
• Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not  
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.  
• Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.  
Image Smoothing  
Enhances the contrast and sharpness of low‑resolution images and smooths  
their color transitions  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in  
resolution.  
PCL Emul menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Font Source  
Resident  
Disk  
Specifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu item  
Notes:  
• Resident is the factory default setting. Resident shows the factory default  
set of fonts downloaded in RAM.  
Download  
Flash  
All  
• Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option.  
• The Flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be read/write‑,  
write‑, or password‑protected.  
• Download shows all the fonts downloaded in RAM.  
• All shows all fonts available to any option.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding printer menus  
225  
Menu item  
Description  
Font Name  
Identifies a specific font and the option where it is stored  
Courier 10  
Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting. Courier 10 shows the font  
name, font ID, and the storage location in the printer. The font source  
abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for download.  
Symbol Set  
10U PC‑8  
Specifies the symbol set for each font name  
Notes:  
12U PC‑850  
• 10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the international  
factory default setting.  
• A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation,  
and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or  
specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the  
supported symbol sets are shown.  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Point Size  
Changes the point size for scalable typographic fonts  
Notes:  
1.00–1008.00  
• 12 is the factory default setting.  
• Point Size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point  
equals approximately 1/72 of an inch.  
• Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25‑point increments.  
Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts  
Notes:  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Pitch  
0.08–100  
• 10 is the factory default setting.  
• Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi).  
• Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.  
• For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but  
cannot be changed.  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Orientation  
Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on the page  
Notes:  
Portrait  
Landscape  
• Portrait is the factory default setting. Portrait prints text and graphics  
parallel to the short edge of the page.  
• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.  
Specifies the number of lines that print on each page  
Notes:  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Lines per Page  
1–255  
60  
• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.  
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the  
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the desired  
Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
226  
Menu item  
Description  
PCL Emulation Settings  
A4 Width  
Sets the printer to print on A4‑size paper  
Notes:  
198 mm  
203 mm  
• 198 mm is the factory default setting.  
• The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of  
eighty 10‑pitch characters.  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after  
a line feed (LF) control command  
Auto CR after LF  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a  
carriage return (CR) control command  
Auto LF after CR  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Tray Renumber  
Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use  
different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders  
Assign MP Feeder  
Off  
Notes:  
None  
0–199  
Assign Tray [x]  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• None is not an available selection. It is only displayed when it is selected  
by the PCL 5 interpreter. It also ignores the Select Paper Feed command.  
Off  
None  
• 0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.  
0–199  
Assign Manual Paper  
Off  
None  
0–199  
Assign Manual Env  
Off  
None  
0–199  
Tray Renumber  
View Factory Defaults  
None  
Displays the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or feeder  
Returns all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default settings  
Tray Renumber  
Restore Defaults  
Yes  
No  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
227  
HTML menu  
Menu Item  
Description  
Font Name  
Albertus MT  
Antique Olive  
Apple Chancery  
Arial MT  
Joanna MT  
Letter Gothic  
Lubalin Graph  
Marigold  
MonaLisa Recut  
Monaco  
New CenturySbk  
New York  
Optima  
Sets the default font for HTML documents  
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not  
specify a font.  
Avant Garde  
Bodoni  
Bookman  
Chicago  
Clarendon  
Cooper Black  
Copperplate  
Coronet  
Oxford  
Palatino  
StempelGaramond  
Taffy  
Courier  
Times  
Eurostile  
Garamond  
Geneva  
Gill Sans  
Goudy  
TimesNewRoman  
Univers  
Zapf Chancery  
NewSansMTCS  
NewSansMTCT  
New SansMTJA  
NewSansMTKO  
Helvetica  
Hoefler Text  
Intl CG Times  
Intl Courier  
Intl Univers  
Menu item  
Description  
Font Size  
Sets the default font size for HTML documents  
Notes:  
• 12 pt is the factory default setting.  
1–255 pt  
• Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.  
Scales the default font for HTML documents  
Notes:  
Scale  
1–400%  
• 100% is the factory default setting.  
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Sets the page orientation for HTML documents  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
228  
Menu item  
Description  
Margin Size  
Sets the page margin for HTML documents  
8–255 mm  
Notes:  
• 19 mm is the factory default setting.  
• Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.  
Backgrounds  
Print  
Specifies whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents  
Note: Print is the factory default setting.  
Do Not Print  
Image menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Auto Fit  
On  
Selects the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation  
Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings  
Off  
for some images.  
Invert  
Off  
Inverts bi‑tonal monochrome images  
Notes:  
On  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.  
Scaling  
Scales the image to fit the selected paper size  
Best Fit  
Notes:  
Anchor Center  
Fit Height/Width  
Fit Height  
• Best Fit is the factory default setting.  
• When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.  
Fit Width  
Anchor Top Left  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Sets the image orientation  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Rev Portrait  
Rev Landscape  
Help menu  
The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer (MFP) as PDF files. They  
contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks, including copying, scanning, and faxing.  
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer.  
Other translations are available on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding printer menus  
229  
Menu item  
Print All Guides  
Copy Guide  
Fax Guide  
Description  
Prints all the guides  
Provides information about making copies and changing settings  
Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers,  
or the address book, and about changing settings  
E‑mail Guide  
Provides information about sending e‑mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or  
the address book, and about changing settings  
FTP Guide  
Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an  
FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings  
Print Defects Guide  
Information Guide  
Supplies Guide  
Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints  
Provides help in locating additional information  
Provides part numbers for ordering supplies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Securing the memory before moving the printer  
230  
Securing the memory before moving the printer  
Statement of Volatility  
Your printer contains various types of memory that are capable of storing device and network settings, information  
from embedded solutions, and user data. The types of memory—along with the types of data stored by each—are  
described below.  
• Volatile memory—Your device utilizes standard Random Access Memory (RAM) to temporarily buffer user data  
during simple print and copy jobs.  
• Non‑volatile memory—Your device may utilize two forms of non-volatile memory: EEPROM and NAND (flash  
memory). Both types are used to store the operating system, device settings, network information, scanner and  
bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.  
• Hard disk memory—Some devices have a hard disk drive installed. The printer hard disk is designed for  
device‑specific functionality and cannot be used for long term storage for data that is not print‑related. The hard  
disk does not provide the capability for users to extract information, create folders, create disk or network file  
shares, or FTP information directly from a client device. The hard disk can retain buffered user data from complex  
scan, print, copy, and fax jobs, as well as form data, and font data.  
There are several circumstances under which you might wish to erase the contents of the memory devices installed in  
your printer. A partial list includes:  
• The printer is being decommissioned  
• The printer hard drive is being replaced  
• The printer is being moved to a different department or location  
• The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization  
• The printer is being removed from your premises for service  
• The printer is being sold to another organization  
Disposing of a hard drive  
Note: Not all printers have a hard disk installed.  
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to ensure that confidential data stored on  
the printer hard disk cannot be accessed once the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises. While  
most data can be erased electronically, you may want to consider one or more of the following actions before disposing  
of a printer or hard disk:  
• Degaussing—Flushes the hard drive with a magnetic field that erases stored data  
• Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable  
• Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits  
Note: While most data can be erased electronically, the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to  
physically destroy each memory device on which data could have been stored.  
Erasing volatile memory  
The volatile memory (RAM) installed on your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the  
buffered data, simply power down the device.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Securing the memory before moving the printer  
231  
Erasing non‑volatile memory  
• Individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions—Erase information  
and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.  
• Fax data—Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.  
1 Turn off the printer.  
MNO  
6
2 Hold down  
and  
while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress  
bar appears.  
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully  
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.  
3 Touch Wipe All Settings.  
The printer will reboot several times during this process.  
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, faxes, and passwords on the printer.  
4 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.  
The printer will power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.  
Erasing printer hard disk memory  
Note: Your printer may not have a hard disk installed.  
Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus enables you to remove residual confidential material left by scan, print,  
copy, and fax jobs, by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.  
Using the printer control panel  
1 Turn off the printer.  
MNO  
6
2 Hold down  
and  
while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress  
bar appears.  
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully  
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.  
3 Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:  
• Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.  
• Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a  
verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely erasing data  
from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.  
4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping. A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.  
Note: Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be  
unavailable for other user tasks.  
5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.  
The printer will power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Securing the memory before moving the printer  
232  
Configuring printer hard disk encryption  
Note: Your printer may not have a hard disk installed.  
Enabling hard disk encryption helps prevent the loss of sensitive data in the event your printer or its hard disk is stolen.  
Using the Embedded Web Server  
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.  
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard disk is  
installed.  
2 From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.  
Notes:  
• Enabling disk encryption will erase the content of the printer hard disk.  
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be  
unavailable for other user tasks.  
3 Click Submit.  
Using the printer control panel  
1 Turn off the printer.  
MNO  
6
2 Hold down  
and  
while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress  
bar appears.  
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. Once the printer is fully  
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of standard home screen icons such as Copy or  
Fax.  
3 Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.  
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.  
4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.  
A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer will  
return to the Enable/Disable screen.  
Notes:  
• Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.  
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be  
unavailable for other user tasks.  
5 Touch Back, and then Exit Config Menu.  
The printer will power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintaining the printer  
233  
Maintaining the printer  
Cleaning the exterior of the printer  
1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,  
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.  
2 Remove paper from the standard exit bin.  
3 Dampen a clean, lint‑free cloth with water.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of  
the printer.  
4 Wipe only the outside of the printer, making sure to include the standard exit bin.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.  
5 Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job.  
Cleaning the scanner glass  
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.  
1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.  
2 Open the scanner cover.  
1
2
4
3
1
2
White underside of the ADF cover  
White underside of the scanner cover  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Maintaining the printer  
234  
3
4
Scanner glass  
ADF glass  
3 Wipe the areas shown and let them dry.  
4 Close the scanner cover.  
Cleaning the ADF parts  
Clean the ADF parts periodically to maintain optimal printing performance. Residue on the ADF parts may cause print  
quality issues and false 28x paper jam messages.  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth with water.  
3 Open the ADF cover.  
1
4 Remove the pick roller assembly.  
1
2
5 Wipe the surface of both pick rollers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintaining the printer  
235  
6 Reinsert the pick roller assembly.  
2
1
7 Wipe the entire surface under the ADF cover, including the two small white rollers.  
8 Close the ADF cover.  
Cleaning the printhead lenses  
1 Open the front door.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintaining the printer  
236  
2 Turn the toner lock lever to the right and pull the toner cartridge out.  
1
2
3 Remove the imaging unit:  
a Open the internal cover.  
b Push the imaging unit lock lever up and pull out the imaging unit.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
237  
4 Locate the LED wipe at the end of the imaging unit. Make sure it is in the correct position.  
5 Reinstall the imaging unit. When inserted into the printer, the LED wipe will rub across the row of LEDs, thus cleaning  
the printhead lenses.  
a Insert the imaging unit into the printer until it clicks into place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
238  
b Using both hands, push the sides of the internal cover firmly until the cover clicks into place.  
2
1
6 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer and then turn the toner lock lever to the left.  
2
1
7 Repeat step 2–6 to for all imaging units.  
8 Close the front door.  
Storing supplies  
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you  
are ready to use them.  
Do not expose supplies to:  
• Direct sunlight  
• Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)  
• High humidity above 80%  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintaining the printer  
239  
• Salty air  
• Corrosive gases  
• Heavy dust  
Checking the status of supplies  
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.  
Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel  
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.  
Checking the status of supplies from a network computer  
Note: The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer.  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Device Status.  
The Device Status page appears, displaying a summary of supply levels.  
Ordering supplies  
To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies  
dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com or contact the  
place where you purchased the printer.  
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.  
Ordering toner cartridges  
When 88.xx [color] cartridge low, or 88.xx [color] cartridge nearly lowappears, order a  
new cartridge.  
When 88.2x Replace [color] cartridgeappears, replace the specified cartridge.  
Estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19798 standard (with about 5% coverage per color). Extremely low  
print coverage (less than 1.25% for a color) for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield for that color  
and may cause cartridge parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Maintaining the printer  
240  
Recommended toner cartridges and part numbers  
Part name  
Part number  
X925H2KG  
X925H2CG  
X925H2MG  
X925H2YG  
Black high‑yield toner cartridge  
Cyan high‑yield toner cartridge  
Magenta high‑yield toner cartridge  
Yellow high‑yield toner cartridge  
Ordering imaging units  
When 84.xx [Color] imaging unit low, or 84.xx [Color] imaging unit nearly lowappears,  
order a replacement imaging unit.  
When84.xx Replace [color] imaging unit and [color] cartridgeappears, replace the specified  
imaging unit and toner cartridge.  
Recommended imaging units and part numbers  
Part name  
Part number  
C925X72G  
C925X75G  
C925X74G  
C925X73G  
Black imaging unit  
Yellow imaging unit  
Magenta imaging unit  
Cyan imaging unit  
Ordering a fuser or a transfer module  
When 80.xx Fuser life warning, 80.xx Fuser near life warning, or 83.xx Transfer  
module life warningappears, order a replacement fuser or a transfer module.  
When 80.xx Replace fuseror 83.xx Replace transfer moduleappears, install the new fuser or the  
new transfer module. For installation information, see the documentation that came with the part.  
Part name  
Part number  
Fuser  
40X6013 (110 volts)  
40X6093 (220 volts)  
Transfer module  
40X6011  
Ordering a waste toner bottle  
When 82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly fullappears, order a replacement waste toner bottle.  
When 82.xx Replace waste toner bottleappears, replace the waste toner bottle.  
Note: Waste toner bottle reuse is not recommended.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Maintaining the printer  
241  
Part name  
Part number  
Waste toner bottle  
C925X76G  
Ordering ADF replacement parts  
Order ADF replacement parts if you experience problems with paper double-feeding or failing to feed through the ADF.  
Part name  
Part number  
40X6328  
ADF separator roll  
ADF pick roll  
40X6327  
Replacing Supplies  
Replacing an imaging unit  
1 Open the front door.  
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the imaging units, do not leave the door open for more  
than 10 minutes.  
2 Open the internal cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Maintaining the printer  
242  
3 Push the imaging unit lock lever up and pull out the imaging unit with the toner cartridge attached to it.  
1
4 Unpack the replacement imaging unit.  
5 Peel off the black protective sheet and the toner sealing tape.  
1
2
6 Insert the imaging unit into the printer until it clicks it into place.  
7 Using both hands, push the sides of the internal cover firmly until the cover clicks into place.  
2
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
243  
8 Unpack the toner cartridge, and then shake it to redistribute the toner.  
9 Peel off the toner sealing tape.  
10 Insert the toner cartridge and turn the lock lever to the left.  
2
1
11 Close the front door.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
244  
Replacing a toner cartridge  
1 Open the front door.  
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the imaging units, do not leave the door open for more  
than 10 minutes.  
2 Turn the toner lock lever to the right and pull the toner cartridge out.  
1
2
3 Unpack the toner cartridge, and then shake it to redistribute the toner.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintaining the printer  
245  
4 Peel off the toner sealing tape.  
5 Insert the new cartridge into the printer and then turn the toner lock lever to the left.  
2
1
6 Close the front door.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
246  
Replacing the waste toner bottle  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Open the front door.  
3 Open the internal cover.  
4 Pull out the used waste toner bottle.  
5 Unpack the new waste toner bottle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintaining the printer  
247  
6 Insert the new waste toner bottle into the printer.  
7 Using both hands, push the sides of the internal cover firmly until it clicks into place.  
2
1
8 Close the front door.  
9 From the printer control panel, reset the Waste Toner Bottle counter in the Supplies menu.  
Moving the printer  
Before moving the printer  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more  
trained personnel to lift it safely.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or  
printer damage:  
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.  
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintaining the printer  
248  
• Lift the printer off the optional tray, and then set it aside instead of trying to lift the tray and printer at the same  
time.  
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer  
warranty.  
Moving the printer to another location  
The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:  
• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer. Any cart  
used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options.  
• Keep the printer in an upright position.  
• Avoid severe jarring movements.  
Shipping the printer  
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Administrative support  
249  
Administrative support  
Finding advanced networking and administrator information  
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system  
support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server  
Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.  
Using the Embedded Web Server  
If the printer is installed on a network, then the Embedded Web Server is available for a range of functions including:  
• Viewing a virtual display of the printer control panel  
• Checking the status of the printer supplies  
• Configuring printer settings  
• Configuring network settings  
• Viewing reports  
To access the Embedded Web Server for your printer:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Notes:  
• If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page, and then locate the IP  
address in the TCP/IP section.  
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Embedded Web Server correctly.  
2 Press Enter.  
Checking the virtual display  
1 Open an Embedded Web Server associated with your printer.  
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen.  
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel, showing printer messages.  
Checking the status of the printer  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Administrative support  
250  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Device Status.  
The device status shows the following:  
• Paper tray settings  
• Level of toner in the print cartridge  
• Percentage of life remaining in the maintenance kit  
• Capacity measurements of certain printer parts  
Setting up e‑mail alerts  
You can have the printer send you an e‑mail when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed,  
added, or when there is a paper jam.  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Under Other Settings, click E‑mail Alert Setup.  
4 Select the items for notification, and type the e‑mail address to receive the alerts.  
5 Click Submit.  
Note: Contact your system support person to set up the e‑mail server.  
Viewing reports  
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the  
printer, the network, and supplies.  
To view reports from a network printer:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Administrative support  
251  
Restoring factory default settings  
If you want to retain a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring  
the factory default settings.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default  
settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All  
downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.  
From the home screen, navigate to:  
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now > Submit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing jams  
252  
Clearing jams  
By carefully selecting paper and loading it properly, you can avoid most jams. If jams do occur, follow the steps outlined  
in this section.  
To clear a jam message and resume printing, clear the entire paper path, and then touch Continue, jam cleared. If Jam  
Recovery is set to On, then the printer prints a new copy of the page that jammed. If Jam Recovery is set to Auto, then  
the printer reprints the jammed page if enough printer memory is available.  
Avoiding jams  
Paper tray recommendations  
• Make sure the paper lies flat in the tray.  
• Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.  
• Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it prior to printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.  
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height.  
• Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly  
against the paper or envelopes.  
• Push the tray in firmly after loading paper.  
Paper recommendations  
• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.  
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.  
• Flex and straighten paper before loading it.  
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.  
• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.  
• Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus.  
• Store paper per manufacturer recommendations.  
Understanding jam numbers and locations  
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location appears on the display. Open doors and covers and remove  
trays to access jam locations. To resolve any paper jam message, you must clear all jammed paper from the paper path.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Clearing jams  
253  
1
7
2
6
4
3
5
Area Jam numbers What to do  
1
280‑289  
1 Remove all paper from the ADF.  
2 Flex and stack the paper.  
3 Reload the ADF.  
4 Adjust the paper guide.  
5 Touch Continue, jam cleared.  
2
3
200‑201  
Open the side cover, and then remove any jams.  
250  
1 Remove all media from the multipurpose feeder.  
2 Flex and stack the media.  
3 Reload the multipurpose feeder.  
4 Adjust the paper guide.  
5 Touch Continue, jam cleared.  
4
5
6
7
230–239  
24x  
Open the side cover, lower the duplex unit, and then remove the jam.  
Open each tray, and then remove any jams.  
203  
Grasp any jammed paper visible in the standard exit bin.  
Open the scan cover, and then remove any jams.  
451  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clearing jams  
254  
200 paper jam  
1 Open the side door.  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
2 Pull the jammed paper up and out to remove it from the paper path.  
Notes:  
• Make sure all paper fragments are removed.  
• If the page is in the fuser, the fuser nip release lever should be lowered and should be switched to envelope  
mode.  
• After removing the jammed page, return the lever to the proper position.  
3 Close the side door.  
4 Touch Continue, jam cleared.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing jams  
255  
201 paper jam  
1 Open the side door.  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
2 Determine where the jam is located, and then remove it:  
a If the paper is visible under the fuser, then grasp it on each side and pull it out.  
b If the paper is not visible, then you will need to remove the fuser unit.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the center of the fuser unit. Doing so will damage the fuser.  
1 Lift the handles on each side of the fuser, and then pull to remove the fuser unit.  
2 Remove the jammed paper.  
Notes:  
• Make sure all paper fragments are removed.  
• Pull the jammed paper downwards.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing jams  
256  
• If the paper is in the fuser, then the fuser nip release lever should be lowered and should be switched  
to envelope mode.  
• After removing the jammed paper, return the lever to the proper position.  
3 Align the fuser unit using the handles on each side, and then place it back into the printer.  
3 Close the side door.  
4 Touch Continue, jam cleared.  
203 paper jam  
1 Grasp any jammed paper visible in the standard exit bin, and then gently pull it out.  
Notes:  
• Make sure all paper fragments are removed.  
• If the page is in the fuser, then the fuser nip release lever should be lowered and should be switched to  
envelope mode.  
• After removing the jammed page, return the lever to the proper position.  
2 Touch Continue, jam cleared.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing jams  
257  
230 paper jam  
1 Open the side door.  
2 Hold onto the handles of the duplexing unit, open the cover, and then remove any jammed paper.  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
3 Close the cover on the duplexing unit.  
4 Close the side door.  
5 Touch Continue, jam cleared.  
231–239 paper jams  
1 Open the side door.  
2 Hold onto the handles of the duplexing unit, open the cover, and then remove any jammed paper.  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Clearing jams  
258  
3 Close the cover of the duplexing unit.  
4 Close the side door.  
5 Touch Continue, jam cleared.  
24x paper jam  
Paper jam in Tray 1  
1 Check the side access door to trays and then pull the jammed pages out.  
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing jams  
259  
2 Open Tray 1, and then pull the jammed pages straight up and out.  
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.  
3 Close Tray 1.  
4 Touch Continue, jam cleared.  
Paper jam in one of the optional trays  
1 Check the side access door to trays and then pull the jammed pages out.  
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clearing jams  
260  
2 Open the specified tray, and then pull the jammed pages out.  
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.  
3 Close the tray.  
4 Touch Continue, jam cleared.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clearing jams  
261  
250 paper jam  
1 Remove any jammed pages from the multipurpose feeder.  
2 Load paper into the multipurpose feeder.  
3 Touch Continue, jam cleared.  
280–289 paper jams  
1 Remove all original documents from the ADF.  
2 Open the ADF cover.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Clearing jams  
262  
3 Grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.  
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.  
4 Close the ADF cover.  
5 Reload original documents back into the ADF, straighten the stack, and then adjust the paper guide.  
6 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.  
290–292 paper jams  
290 paper jam  
Close the ADF cover.  
291 paper jam  
Close the scanner glass cover.  
292 paper jam  
Try one of more of the following:  
• Close the ADF cover.  
• Close the scanner cover.  
• Contact your system support system person.  
451 paper jam  
1 Open the scanner cover, and then remove any jammed paper.  
2 Close the scanner cover.  
3 Touch Continue, jam cleared.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
263  
Troubleshooting  
Solving basic printer problems  
If there are basic printer problems, or the printer is unresponsive, make sure:  
• The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.  
• The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.  
• The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.  
• Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working.  
• The printer is turned on. Check the printer power switch.  
• The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network  
device.  
• All options are properly installed.  
• The printer driver settings are correct.  
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the  
printer back on. This often fixes the problem.  
Understanding printer messages  
Adjusting color  
Wait for the process to complete.  
An error has occurred with the USB drive. Please remove and reinsert drive.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Remove and reinsert the flash drive.  
• If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacement.  
Change [paper source] to [custom type name]  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.  
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer  
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.  
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Troubleshooting  
264  
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]  
Try one or more of the following  
• Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.  
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer  
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.  
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.  
Change [paper source] to [custom string]  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.  
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer  
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.  
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.  
Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.  
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer  
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.  
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.  
Change [paper source] to [paper size] [paper type]  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.  
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer  
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.  
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.  
Change [paper source] to [paper size] [paper type] load [orientation]  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.  
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer  
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.  
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.  
Close [tray] door  
Close the specified tray door.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Troubleshooting  
265  
Close front or side door  
Close the front or side door of the printer.  
Disk corrupted  
The printer attempted a hard disk recovery on a corrupted hard disk, and the hard disk cannot be repaired. The hard  
disk must be reformatted.  
Touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message.  
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk.  
Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.  
• Install a hard disk with higher capacity.  
Disk problem  
The printer hard disk must be reformatted.  
Touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message.  
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk.  
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.  
An unsupported USB device has been inserted. Remove the USB device, and then install a supported one.  
Insert Tray [x]  
Insert the specified tray into the printer.  
Install Tray [x]  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Install the specified tray:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Install the specified tray.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.  
5 Turn the printer back on.  
• Cancel the print job.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Troubleshooting  
266  
Load [src] with [custom type name]  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.  
• Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find  
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default paper source.  
• Cancel the print job.  
Load [src] with [custom string]  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.  
• Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find  
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default paper source.  
• Cancel the print job.  
Load [src] with [size]  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.  
• Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find  
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it feeds from the default paper source.  
• Cancel the print job.  
Load [src] with [type] [size]  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.  
• Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find  
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it feeds from the default paper source.  
• Cancel the print job.  
Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name]  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Load the specified paper in the manual feeder.  
• Touch Prompt each page, paper loadedor Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.  
• Cancel the print job.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Troubleshooting  
267  
Load Manual Feeder with [custom string]  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Load the specified paper in the manual feeder.  
• Touch Prompt each page, paper loadedor Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.  
• Cancel the print job.  
Load Manual Feeder with [paper size]  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Load the specified paper in the manual feeder.  
• Touch Prompt each page, paper loadedor Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.  
• Cancel the print job.  
Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size]  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Load the specified paper in the manual feeder.  
• Touch Prompt each page, paper loadedor Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.  
• Cancel the print job.  
Paper changes needed  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Use current supplies to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
Remove paper from standard output bin  
Remove the paper stack from the standard output bin.  
Replace separator pad  
Install a new separator pad.  
Restore held jobs?  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk.  
• Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Troubleshooting  
268  
Some held jobs were not restored  
Touch Continue to delete the specified job.  
Note: Held jobs that are not restored stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible.  
Supply needed to complete job  
A supply needed to complete the job is missing. Touch Cancel to clear the message.  
Tray [x] paper size unsupported  
The paper size in the specified tray is unsupported. Replace it with a supported paper size.  
Unsupported disk  
An unsupported disk has been inserted. Remove the unsupported disk, and then install a supported one.  
1565 Emulation error, load emulation option  
The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds, and then disables the download emulator on the firmware  
card.  
30.xx Missing [color] cartridge and/or [color] imaging unit  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Remove and reinstall the specified toner cartridge or imaging unit. For instructions on removing a toner cartridge  
or imaging unit, touch More information.  
• Install a new toner cartridge or imaging unit, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.  
31.xx Missing or defective [color] cartridge  
Try one or more of the following:  
1 Remove and reinstall the specified print cartridge.  
For instructions on removing a print cartridge, touch More Information.  
2 Touch Continue to clear the message.  
Note: If the message is not cleared, then replace the defective print cartridge.  
32.xx [color] cartridge part number unsupported by device  
Remove the unsupported toner cartridge, and then install a supported one.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Troubleshooting  
269  
34 Incorrect paper size, open [src]  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Load the appropriate paper or specialty media in the proper tray.  
• Confirm that the wheel on tray 1 is set to the paper size loaded in the tray. Make sure this size is the size you are  
trying to print.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray.  
• Check length and width guides of the tray and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray.  
• Make sure the Print Properties or Print dialog settings have the correct paper size and type.  
• Check that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, make sure the paper  
is large enough for the data being printed.  
• Cancel the print job.  
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing.  
• To enable Resource Save after receiving this message, make sure the link buffers are set to Auto, and then exit the  
menus to activate the link buffer changes. When Readyappears, enable Resource Save.  
• Install additional memory.  
36 Printer service required  
Touch Continue to clear the message or contact customer support.  
37 Insufficient memory to collate job  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.  
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data in printer memory.  
• Install additional printer memory.  
37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted  
The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.  
Touch Continue to clear the message.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Troubleshooting  
270  
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored  
The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the printer hard disk.  
Touch Continue to clear the message.  
38 Memory full  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Cancel job to clear the message.  
• Install additional printer memory.  
39 Complex page, some data may not have printed  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
• Install additional printer memory.  
51 Defective flash detected  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted.  
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.  
• Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.  
53 Unformatted flash detected  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.  
• Format the flash memory. If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacing.  
54 Serial option [x] error  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Check that the serial cable is properly connected and is the correct one for the serial port.  
• Check that the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer  
and host computer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Troubleshooting  
271  
• Touch Continue to continue printing.  
• Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer.  
54 Standard network software error  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to continue printing.  
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.  
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.  
54 Network [x] software error  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to continue printing.  
• Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.  
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer.  
55 Unsupported option in slot [x]  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board, and then replace it with a supported card.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.  
5 Turn the printer back on.  
56 Parallel port [x] disabled  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.  
• Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.  
56 Serial port [x] disabled  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
The printer discards any data received through the serial port.  
• Make sure the Serial Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Troubleshooting  
272  
56 Standard parallel port disabled  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.  
• Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.  
56 Standard USB port disabled  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.  
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.  
56 USB port [x] disabled  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.  
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.  
57 Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored  
Something has changed in the printer to invalidate the held jobs. Possible changes include:  
• The printer firmware has been updated.  
• Paper input options needed for the print job were removed.  
• The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the USB port.  
• The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model.  
Touch Continue to clear the message.  
58 Input config error  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Check if all tray configurations are correct. Remove unnecessary trays if needed.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.  
5 Turn the printer back on.  
58 Too many disks installed  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Troubleshooting  
273  
3 Remove the excess disks.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.  
5 Turn the printer back on.  
58 Too many flash options installed  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the excess flash memory.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer back on.  
58 Too many trays attached  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the additional trays.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer back on.  
61 Remove defective disk  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Remove the defective printer hard disk.  
• Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk.  
62 Disk full  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.  
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.  
• Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.  
80.xx Fuser near life warning  
1 Order a replacement fuser immediately.  
2 When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement  
part.  
3 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Troubleshooting  
274  
80.xx Fuser life warning  
• Order a replacement fuser immediately. When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser, following the  
instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
80.xx Replace fuser  
Replace the fuser using the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.  
80.xx Fuser missing  
1 Replace the fuser, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.  
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
82.xx Replace waste toner bottle  
1 Replace the waste toner bottle.  
For instructions on replacing the waste toner bottle, from the printer control panel touch More Information.  
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly full  
Order a replacement waste toner bottle immediately.  
1 Replace the waste toner bottle.  
For instructions on installing the waste toner bottle, from the printer control panel touch More Information.  
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
83.xx Transfer module life warning  
1 Replace the transfer module, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.  
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
83.xx Transfer module missing  
Insert the transfer module into the printer.  
83.xx Replace transfer module  
Replace the transfer module, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Troubleshooting  
275  
84 Defective [color] imaging unit  
The specified imaging unit is either missing or not functioning properly. Try one or more of the following:  
• Remove the specified imaging unit, and then reinstall it.  
• Remove the specified imaging unit , and then install a new one.  
84.xx [color] imaging unit nearly low  
1 Order a replacement imaging unit.  
2 When print quality is reduced, install the new imaging unit, following the instruction sheet that came with the  
replacement part.  
3 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
84.xx [color] imaging unit low  
1 Order a replacement imaging unit immediately.  
2 When print quality is reduced, install the new imaging unit, following the instruction sheet that came with the  
replacement part.  
3 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
84.xx Replace [color] imaging unit and [color] cartridge  
1 Replace the imaging unit and color cartridge, following the instruction sheets that came with the replacement parts.  
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
84 Unsupported [color] imaging unit  
Replace the specified imaging unit to continue printing.  
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly low  
1 Order a replacement toner cartridge.  
2 Remove the specified cartridge.  
3 Firmly shake the cartridge side‑to‑side and front‑to‑back several times to redistribute the toner.  
4 Reinsert the cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
Note: Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded, and then replace the cartridge.  
88.xx [color] cartridge low  
1 Order a replacement toner cartridge immediately.  
2 Remove the specified cartridge.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Troubleshooting  
276  
3 Firmly shake the cartridge side‑to‑side and front‑to‑back several times to redistribute the toner.  
4 Reinsert the cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
Note: Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded, and then replace the cartridge.  
88.2x Replace [color] cartridge  
The specified toner cartridge is empty.  
1 Replace the specified toner cartridge.  
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
Solving printing problems  
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print  
The PDF files may contain unavailable fonts.  
1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.  
2 Click the printer icon > Advanced > Print as image > OK > OK.  
Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds  
The printer self test failed. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.  
If Readydoes not appear, then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support.  
Error message about reading USB drive appears  
Make sure the flash drive is supported.  
Print jobs do not print  
Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PROBLEM WITH YOUR PRINTER  
From the printer control panel, check the status. If necessary, follow the recovery instructions.  
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT  
Make sure Readyappears on the display before sending a print job.  
CHECK IF A SUPPLY IS MISSING OR NEEDS REPLACEMENT  
Remove and then reinstall or replace the supply.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Troubleshooting  
277  
CHECK IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL  
Remove the paper stack from the standard exit bin.  
CHECK IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY  
Load paper in the tray.  
MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED  
• Verify that you are using the correct printer software.  
• If the printer is connected to your computer through a USB port, then make sure you are running a supported  
operating system and using a compatible printer software.  
MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS WORKING PROPERLY  
• Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network.  
• Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected. If the status is Not Connected,  
then check the network cables, and then try printing the network setup page again. Contact your system support  
person to make sure the network is functioning correctly.  
The printer software is available on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.  
MAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED USB, SERIAL, OR ETHERNET CABLE  
For more information, visit the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.  
MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED  
Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure.  
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.  
Confidential and other held jobs do not print  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
PARTIAL JOB, NO JOB, OR BLANK PAGE PRINTS  
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.  
• Delete the print job, and then print it again.  
• For PDF documents, recreate the PDF and then print it again.  
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting  
all jobs except the first one.  
• For Windows users, open Print Properties. From the Print and Hold dialog, select the "Keep duplicate documents"  
check box under the User name text box before entering a PIN number.  
• For Macintosh users, save each print job, naming each job differently, and then send the individual jobs to the  
printer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
278  
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY  
Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them.  
Print job takes longer than expected  
Try one or more of the following:  
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB  
Eliminate the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the print  
job.  
TURN OFF THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING  
From the home screen, navigate to:  
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Off >  
CHANGE THE ENVIRONMENTAL SETTINGS  
When using Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode settings, you may notice a reduction in performance.  
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE SETTINGS  
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the paper type and paper size settings.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.  
Incorrect characters print  
• Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode. If Ready Hexappears on the display, you must exit Hex Trace  
mode before you can print your job. Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode.  
• Make sure the SmartSwitch settings are set to On in the Network and USB menus.  
Tray linking does not work  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER  
• Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked.  
• Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting  
279  
USE THE SAME PAPER SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS  
• Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray.  
• If necessary, adjust the settings from the Paper Size/Type menu.  
Note: The standard 550-sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder do not automatically sense the paper size. You  
must set the size from the Paper Size/Type menu.  
Large jobs do not collate  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON  
From the Finishing menu or Print Properties, set Collate to On.  
Note: Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.  
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB  
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of  
images, and the number of pages in the job.  
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY  
Add printer memory or an optional hard disk.  
Unexpected page breaks occur  
INCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE  
1 From the home screen, navigate to:  
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts  
2 Touch the left or right arrow next to Print Timeoutuntil the desired value appears.  
3 Touch Submit.  
Solving copy problems  
Copier does not respond  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES  
Clear any error messages.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting  
280  
CHECK THE POWER  
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Readyappears.  
Scanner unit does not close  
Make sure there are no obstructions:  
1 Lift the scanner unit.  
2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.  
3 Lower the scanner unit.  
Poor copy quality  
These are some examples of poor copy quality:  
• Blank pages  
• Checkerboard pattern  
• Distorted graphics or pictures  
• Missing characters  
• Faded print  
• Dark print  
• Skewed lines  
• Smudges  
• Streaks  
• Unexpected characters  
• White lines in print  
Try one or more of the following:  
CLEAR ANY ERROR MESSAGES  
Check the display and clear any error messages.  
REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE  
When the print remains faded, replace the toner or print cartridge.  
CLEAN THE SCANNER GLASS  
The scanner glass may be dirty. Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint‑free cloth dampened with water.  
For more information, see “Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 233.  
ADJUST THE TONER DARKNESS OF THE COPY  
Adjust the toner darkness from the Copy menus.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
281  
MAKE SURE THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT IS SATISFACTORY  
Check the quality of the original document.  
PLACE THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT PROPERLY  
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
MAKE SURE TO USE THE APPROPRIATE COPY SETTINGS  
When patterns (moiré) appear in the output:  
• On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being  
scanned.  
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:  
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > lower the Sharpness setting  
• On the Copy screen, make sure no scaling is being selected.  
When the text is light or disappearing:  
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:  
Content > Text >  
> select the appropriate source for the original document being copied >  
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:  
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > increase the current setting  
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:  
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Background removal, and then reduce the current setting  
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:  
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Contrast > increase the current setting  
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:  
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Shadow detail > reduce the current setting  
When the output appears washed out or overexposed:  
• On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being  
scanned.  
• From the Copy screen, adjust the Darkness setting.  
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:  
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Shadow detail > reduce the current setting  
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:  
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Background removal > reduce the current setting  
Partial document or photo copies  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT  
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
282  
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING  
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.  
Solving scanner problems  
Checking an unresponsive scanner  
If your scanner is not responding, then make sure:  
• The printer is turned on.  
• The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network  
device.  
• The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.  
• The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.  
• The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.  
• Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.  
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off and then back on. This often fixes the problem  
with the scanner.  
Scan was not successful  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS  
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.  
AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM  
Turn off and then restart the computer.  
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING  
Close all programs not being used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting  
283  
THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH  
Select a lower scan resolution.  
Poor scanned image quality  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES  
Clear any error messages.  
THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY  
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint‑free cloth dampened with water. For more information, see “Cleaning the  
scanner glass” on page 233.  
ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION  
Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output.  
CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT  
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.  
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT  
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
Partial document or photo scans  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT  
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING  
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
284  
Cannot scan from a computer  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES  
Clear any error messages.  
CHECK THE POWER  
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Readyappears.  
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS  
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.  
Solving fax problems  
Fax and e-mail functions are not set up  
The indicator light blinks red until you set up fax and e‑mail. To set up fax and e‑mail, follow these steps:  
Note: Before completing these instructions for a printer on a network, make sure the fax cables are connected.  
1 From the home screen, navigate to:  
> General Settings > Run initial setup > Yes > Submit  
2 Turn the printer off, and then turn it back on.  
3 From the printer control panel, touch your language.  
4 Touch your country or region, and then touch Continue.  
5 Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.  
6 Touch Fax and E‑mail to clear the icons, and then touch Continue.  
Note: You can use these same steps to disable fax and e‑mail.  
Caller ID is not shown  
Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.  
If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings  
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2). The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on  
whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns. Contact your telecommunications company to  
determine which pattern or switch setting to use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting  
285  
Cannot send or receive a fax  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES  
Clear any error messages.  
CHECK THE POWER  
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Readyappears.  
CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS  
Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure, if applicable:  
• Telephone  
• Handset  
• Answering machine  
CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK  
1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack.  
2 Listen for a dial tone.  
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone into the wall jack.  
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug a telephone into a different wall jack.  
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.  
REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST  
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services  
can be used.  
• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface  
port) on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN  
provider.  
• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information,  
contact your DSL provider.  
• If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX.  
If none exists, consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.  
CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE  
• Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly.  
• If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending  
a fax.  
• If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
286  
TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT  
To ensure the printer is working correctly, connect it directly to the telephone line. Disconnect any answering  
machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters.  
CHECK FOR JAMS  
Clear any jams, and then make sure that Readyappears.  
TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING  
Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions. Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax. Call your telephone  
company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting.  
VOICE MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION  
Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions. To enable both Voice Mail  
and the printer to answer calls, you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.  
THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL  
1 Dial the fax number.  
2 Scan the original document one page at a time.  
Can send but not receive faxes  
Try one or more of the following:  
LOAD PAPER  
If the tray is empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.  
CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS  
The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone rings before the printer answers. If you have extension  
phones on the same line as the printer, or subscribe to the telephone company's Distinctive Ring service, then keep  
the Ring Delay setting at 4.  
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:  
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.  
3 In the Rings to Answer field, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before the printer answers.  
4 Click Submit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
287  
REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE  
Replace the toner or print cartridge.  
Can receive but not send faxes  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
THE PRINTER IS NOT IN FAX MODE  
On the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode.  
THE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY  
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left  
corner.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY  
• Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial.  
• As an alternative, dial the telephone number manually.  
Received fax has poor print quality  
Try one or more of the following:  
RESEND THE DOCUMENT  
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:  
• Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory.  
• Resend the fax. There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection.  
• Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.  
REPLACE THE CARTRIDGE  
When 88 Cartridge lowappears or when the prints appear faded, replace the cartridge.  
MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH  
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed:  
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP  
address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
288  
3 In the Max Speed box, click one of the following:  
2400  
4800  
9600  
14400  
33600  
4 Click Submit.  
Solving home screen applications problems  
An application error has occurred  
CHECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS  
1 Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer, then you can:  
• View the information on the printer control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the  
Networks/Ports menu.  
• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings or Configuration.  
3 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > System tab > Log.  
4 From the Filter menu, select an application status.  
5 From the Application menu, select an application, and then click Submit.  
MAKE SURE THE FILE NAME YOU WANT TO SCAN TO IS NOT ALREADY IN USE  
Verify that the file to which you want to scan is not open by another application or user.  
To help prevent errors, make sure either “Append time stamp” or “Overwrite existing file” is selected in the  
destination configuration settings.  
ADJUST THE SCAN SETTINGS  
In the destination configuration settings, lower the scan settings. For example, lower the scan resolution, disable  
Color, or change the Content type to Text.  
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT  
If you still cannot isolate the problem, then contact customer support.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
289  
Solving option problems  
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed  
Try one or more of the following:  
RESET THE PRINTER  
Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.  
CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER  
1 Turn the printer off using the power switch.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and then from the printer.  
3 Check the connection between the option and the printer.  
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY  
Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not  
listed, then reinstall it. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option, or  
go to www.lexmark.com to view the option instruction sheet.  
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED  
From the computer you are printing from, select the option.  
For more information, see “Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 62.  
Paper tray problems  
Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY  
1 Open the paper tray.  
2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds.  
3 Make sure the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.  
4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly.  
RESET THE PRINTER  
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
290  
MAKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY  
If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page, but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray, then it may not  
be properly installed. Reinstall the paper tray. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that  
came with the paper tray, or go to http://support.lexmark.com to view the paper tray instruction sheet.  
Cannot detect flash memory card  
Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.  
Cannot detect printer hard disk  
Make sure the printer hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board.  
Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly  
Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE INTERNAL SOLUTIONS PORT (ISP) CONNECTIONS  
Make sure the ISP is securely connected to the printer system board.  
CHECK THE CABLE  
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected to the Internal Solutions (ISP) port.  
MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY  
For information on installing the network printing software, see the Networking Guide on the Software and  
Documentation CD.  
Internal print server does not operate correctly  
Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PRINT SERVER CONNECTIONS  
• Make sure the internal print server is attached securely to the printer system board.  
• Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.  
MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY  
For more information on installing the network printing software, do the following:  
1 Open the Software and Documentation CD.  
2 Click Additional.  
3 Under Publications on this CD, select Networking Guide.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting  
291  
Memory card  
Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.  
USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly  
CHECK THE USB/PARALLEL INTERFACE CARD CONNECTION  
Make sure the USB/parallel interface card is securely connected to the printer system board.  
CHECK THE CABLE  
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.  
Solving paper feed problems  
Paper frequently jams  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PAPER  
Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty  
media guidelines.  
MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY  
Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the  
multipurpose feeder.  
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES  
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.  
THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY  
• Load paper from a fresh package.  
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared  
CHECK THE PAPER PATH  
The paper path is not clear. Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path, and then touch Continue.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Troubleshooting  
292  
Jammed pages are not reprinted  
TURN ON JAM RECOVERY  
1 From the home screen, navigate to:  
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery  
2 Touch the arrows next to Jam Recoveryuntil Onor Autoappears.  
3 Touch Submit.  
Solving print quality problems  
If these suggestions do not correct the problem, then contact customer support. You may have a printer part that  
requires adjustment or replacement.  
Characters have jagged or uneven edges  
If you are using downloaded fonts, verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and the  
software program.  
Clipped images  
Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE GUIDES  
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.  
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING  
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting  
293  
Fine horizontal lines appear on color pages  
You may notice fine, horizontal lines in photographs or pages with a high concentration of color. This can occur when  
the printer is in Quiet Mode. To fix this, set Quiet Mode to Off (Image/Photo).  
Gray background  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
CHECK THE TONER DARKNESS SETTING  
Select a lighter Toner Darkness setting:  
• From the printer control panel Quality menu, change the setting.  
• For Windows users, change the setting from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, change the setting from the Print dialog.  
THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
Incorrect margins  
ABCD  
ABCD  
ABCD  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES  
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
294  
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING  
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.  
Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line appears on prints  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE  
Replace the defective toner cartridge.  
MAKE SURE THE IMAGING UNIT IS NOT DEFECTIVE  
Replace the defective imaging unit.  
MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT DEFECTIVE  
Replace the transfer module.  
CLEAN THE PRINTHEAD LENSES  
Remove and reinstall the imaging unit. The LED wipe at the end of the imaging unit will rub across the row of LEDs,  
thus cleaning the printhead lenses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
295  
Paper curl  
Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS  
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:  
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.  
2 Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.  
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE  
Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
Print irregularities  
Try one or more of the following:  
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE  
The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS  
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:  
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.  
2 Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.  
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES  
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE  
Replace the worn or defective toner cartridge.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
296  
MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT DEFECTIVE  
Replace the defective transfer module. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the  
replacement part.  
MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT DEFECTIVE  
Replace the defective fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.  
Print is too dark  
Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS  
The Toner Darkness setting may be too dark, the Brightness setting may be too dark, or the Contrast setting may be  
too high.  
• Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu.  
• For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users:  
1 Choose File > Print.  
2 From the Orientation pictures drop‑down menu, choose Printer Features.  
3 Choose a lower value for the Toner Darkness, Brightness, and Contrast settings.  
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE  
The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:  
• From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.  
• For Windows users, check this setting from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, check this setting from the Print dialog.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
297  
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE  
Replace the defective toner cartridge.  
Print is too light  
Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS  
The Toner Darkness setting may be too light, the Brightness setting may be too light, or the Contrast setting may be  
too low.  
• Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu.  
• For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties  
• For Macintosh users:  
1 Choose File > Print.  
2 From the Orientation pictures drop‑down menu, choose Printer Features.  
3 Choose a higher value for the Toner Darkness, Brightness, and Contrast settings.  
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE  
The paper may have absorbed moisture from high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:  
• From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.  
• For Windows users, check this setting from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, check this setting from the Print dialog.  
MAKE SURE THE TONER CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER  
When 88.xx [color] cartridge lowappears, make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the print  
cartridge.  
1 Remove the toner cartridge.  
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
298  
3 Reinsert the toner cartridge.  
Note: If print quality does not improve, replace the print cartridge.  
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.  
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE  
Replace the defective toner cartridge.  
Printer is printing blank pages  
Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PACKING MATERIAL LEFT ON THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE  
Remove the cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed. Reinstall the cartridge.  
MAKE SURE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER  
When 88.xx [color] cartridge lowappears, make sure that toner is distributed evenly among all four  
cartridges:  
1 Remove the cartridge.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print  
quality of future print jobs.  
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.  
3 Reinsert the cartridge.  
Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the cartridge of the color that is not printing.  
If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.  
Repeating defects appear on a page  
Cause  
Solution  
)
)
If marks occur repeatedly in only one color and multiple times on a page:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
299  
Cause  
Solution  
The transfer module is defective.  
Replace the transfer module if the defects occur every:  
• 38 mm (1.50 in.)  
An imaging unit is defective.  
Replace the imaging unit if the defects occur every:  
• 41.0 mm (1.61 in.)  
• 75.0 mm (2.95 in.)  
If marks occur down the page repeatedly in all colors:  
The fuser is defective.  
Replace the fuser if the defects occur every:  
• 141 mm (5.55 in.)  
Shadow images appear on prints  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS  
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
MAKE SURE THE IMAGING UNIT IS NOT DEFECTIVE  
Replace the imaging unit.  
MAKE SURE THE TONER CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER  
When 88.xx [color] cartridge lowappears, make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the toner  
cartridge.  
1 Remove the toner cartridge.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print  
quality of future print jobs.  
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.  
3 Reinsert the toner cartridge.  
Note: If print quality does not improve, replace the toner cartridge.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
300  
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.  
Skewed print  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES  
Move the length and width guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.  
• Make sure the guides are not too far from the paper stack.  
• Make sure the guides are not pressing too lightly against the paper stack.  
CHECK THE PAPER  
Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications.  
Solid color pages  
Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE THE IMAGING UNIT IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY AND IS NOT DEFECTIVE  
Remove and then reinstall the imaging unit. If the problem continues, the imaging unit may need to be replaced.  
MAKE SURE THE TONER CARTRIDGES ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY, ARE NOT DEFECTIVE AND NOT LOW ON  
TONER  
• Remove and reinstall the toner cartridges.  
• Make sure toner is distributed evenly within the toner cartridge:  
1 Remove the toner cartridge.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the  
print quality of future print jobs.  
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.  
3 Reinsert the toner cartridge.  
Note: If print quality does not improve, replace the toner cartridge.  
• If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
301  
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Try one or more of the following:  
SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER  
• From the printer control panel Paper Menu, select Default Source.  
• For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop‑up menus.  
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN, DEFECTIVE, OR EMPTY TONER CARTRIDGE  
Replace the worn, defective, or empty toner cartridge.  
CLEAR THE PAPER PATH AROUND THE TONER CARTRIDGE  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
Clear any paper you see or clean any visible toner from the paper path. If the problem persists, then contact Customer  
Support.  
Streaked vertical lines appear on prints  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Try one or more of the following:  
SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER  
• From the printer control panel Paper menu, select Default Source  
• For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop‑up menus.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
302  
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN, DEFECTIVE, OR EMPTY TONER CARTRIDGE  
Replace the worn, defective, or empty toner cartridge.  
CLEAR THE PAPER PATH AROUND THE TONER CARTRIDGE  
Check the paper path around the toner cartridge.  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
Clear any paper you see.  
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO TONER IN THE PAPER PATH  
Toner fog or background shading appears on the page  
Cause  
Solution  
Toner cartridge may be defective or installed incorrectly.  
Transfer module may be worn or defective.  
Imaging unit may be worn or defective.  
Fuser may be worn or defective.  
Reinstall or replace the toner cartridge.  
Replace the transfer module.  
Replace the imaging unit.  
Replace the fuser.  
Toner may be in the paper path.  
Call for service.  
Printer may not have recalibrated recently.  
Application may specify an off‑white background.  
Perform color adjust from the Quality menu.  
Check the application.  
Toner rubs off  
Cause  
Solution  
Make sure the correct Paper Type is selected.  
Specialty media is being used.  
The Paper Weight setting in the Paper Menu is  
wrong for the type of paper being used.  
Change the Paper Weight from Normal to Heavy. If necessary, change  
Paper Texture from Normal to Rough.  
Fuser is worn or defective.  
Fuser is in envelope mode.  
Replace the fuser.  
Open the side door. Make sure that the green lever on the left side of  
the fuser is not in envelope mode.  
Toner specks  
Cause  
Solution  
Toner cartridges may be worn or defective.  
Toner is in the paper path.  
The imaging unit may be defective.  
Replace the defective or worn cartridges.  
Call for service.  
Replace the defective imaging unit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
303  
Transparency print quality is poor  
Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES  
Use only transparencies that meet the printer specifications.  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the paper type setting is set to Transparency:  
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
Uneven print density  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE OR WORN TONER CARTRIDGE  
Replace the worn or defective toner cartridge.  
MAKE SURE THE IMAGING UNIT IS NOT DEFECTIVE  
Replace the defective imaging unit.  
Solving color quality problems  
FAQ about color printing  
What is RGB color?  
Red, green, and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in  
nature. For example, red and green can be combined to create yellow. Televisions and computer monitors create  
colors in this manner. RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red, green, or blue  
needed to produce a certain color.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting  
304  
What is CMYK color?  
Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (known as CMYK color) inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce  
a large range of colors observed in nature. For example, cyan and yellow can be combined to create green. Printing  
presses, inkjet printers, and color laser/LED printers create colors in thismanner. CMYK color is a methodof describing  
colors by indicating the amount of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black needed to reproduce a particular color.  
How is color specified in a document to be printed?  
Software applications typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations. Additionally, they  
commonly let you modify the color of each object in a document. For more information, see the software application  
Help section.  
How does the printer know what color to print?  
When you print a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer. The color  
information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of cyan,  
magenta, yellow, and black toner needed to produce the desired color. The object type information lets different  
color conversion tables be used for different types of objects. For example, it is possible to apply one type of color  
conversion table to text while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images.  
Should I use PostScript or PCL emulation printer software? What settings should I use for the best color?  
The PostScript driver is strongly recommended for best color quality. The default settings in the PostScript driver  
provide preferred color quality for the majority of printouts.  
Why doesn't the printed color match the color that I see on the computer screen?  
The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard  
computer monitor. However, because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors, there are  
many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions. For recommendations on how  
the printer color sample pages may be useful in solving certain color‑matching problems, see the question, “How  
can I match a particular color (such as a color in a corporate logo)?”  
The printed page appears tinted. Can I slightly adjust the color?  
Sometimes you may consider printed pages to appear tinted (for example, everything printed seems to be too red).  
This can be caused by environmental conditions, paper type, lighting conditions, or user preference. In these  
instances, adjusting the Color Balance setting may create more preferable color. Color Balance lets you make subtle  
adjustments to the amount of toner being used in each color plane. Selecting positive (or negative) values for cyan,  
magenta, yellow, and black under the Color Balance menu will slightly increase (or decrease) the amount of toner  
used for the chosen color. For example, if you believe the overall printed page to be too red, then decreasing both  
magenta and yellow could potentially improve color.  
My color transparencies seem dark when being projected. Is there anything I can do to improve the color?  
This problem most commonly occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain  
the highest projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended. If a reflective projector  
must be used, then adjusting the Toner Darkness setting to 1, 2, or 3 will lighten the transparency.  
Make sure to print on the recommended type of color transparencies. For more information about the paper and  
media specifications, see the User's Guide on the Software and Documentation CD.  
What is manual color correction?  
The color conversion tables applied to each object when using the default Auto Color Correction setting generate  
preferred color for the majority of documents. Occasionally, you may want to apply a different color table mapping.  
This customization is accomplished using the Manual Color menu and the Manual Color Correction setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
305  
Manual Color Correction applies to RGB and CMYK color conversion table mappings as defined in the Manual Color  
menu.  
You can select any of the different color conversion tables for RGB or CMYK:  
Color conversion table  
Settings  
RGB  
• sRGB Display  
• Display–True Black  
• sRGB Vivid  
• Vivid  
• Off  
CMYK  
• US CMYK  
• Euro CMYK  
• Vivid CMYK  
• Off  
Note: The Manual Color Correction setting is not useful if the software application does not specify colors with  
RGB or CMYK combinations. It is also not effective in situations where the software application or the computer  
operating system controls the adjustment of colors.  
How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?  
Occasionally, you may have a need for the printed color of a particular object to closely match a specific color. For  
example, you may need to match the color of a corporate logo. While instances can occur in which the printer cannot  
exactly reproduce the desired color, you should be able to identify adequate color matches for the majority of cases.  
The Color Samples menu item can provide useful information in helping solve this particular type of color‑matching  
problem. The nine Color Samples values correspond to color conversion tables in the printer. Selecting any of the  
Color Samples values generates a multiple‑page printout consisting of hundreds of colored boxes. Either a CMYK or  
RGB combination is located on each box, depending on the table selected. The observed color of each box is obtained  
by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled on the box through the selected color conversion table.  
You can examine the color samples pages and identify the box whose color is the closest to the desired color. The  
color combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software application.  
For instructions, see the software application Help. Manual Color Correction may be necessary to utilize the selected  
color conversion table for the particular object.  
Selecting which Color Samples pages to use for a particular color‑matching problem depends on the Color Correction  
setting being used (Auto, Off, or Manual), the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how the  
color of the object is specified in the software application (RGB or CMYK combinations). When the printer Color  
Correction setting is set to Off, the color is based on the print job information; no color conversion is implemented.  
Note: The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software application does not specify colors with RGB or  
CMYK combinations. Additionally, certain situations exist where the software application or the computer  
operating system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the application through color management.  
The resulting printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages.  
The following table can help identify which Color Sample pages to use for color matching.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
306  
Color specification and object to be  
printed  
Color Correction setting  
Sample pages to use  
RGB—Text  
Auto  
sRGB Vivid  
Manual  
Auto  
Manual Color RGB Text Setting  
sRGB Vivid  
RGB—Graphic  
RGB—Image  
CMYK—Text  
CMYK—Graphic  
CMYK—Image  
Manual  
Auto  
Manual Color RGB Graphic Setting  
sRGB Display  
Manual  
Auto  
Manual Color RGB Image Setting  
US CMYK or Euro CMYK  
Manual Color CMYK Text Setting  
US CMYK  
Manual  
Auto  
Manual  
Auto  
Manual Color CMYK Graphic Setting  
US CMYK  
Manual  
Manual Color CMYK Image Setting  
What are Detailed Color Samples and how do I access them?  
These pages require the use of the Embedded Web Server. The Embedded Web Server is a series of resident pages  
stored in the network printer firmware. To access these pages, browse to the IP address of the network printer. Click  
Configuration Menu, and then click Detailed Color Samples.  
For more information about using the Embedded Web Server, see the User's Guide on the Software and  
Documentation CD.  
Detailed Color Samples are pages similar to the default pages of color samples accessible from the Quality menu  
using the printer control panel. The default color samples available using this method have an increment value of  
10% for red, green, and blue. If you find a value on this page that is close, but would like to scan more colors in a  
nearby area, then you can use the Detailed Color Samples to select the desired color values and a more specific  
increment. This provides a way to print multiple pages of colored boxes that surround a specific color of interest.  
There are nine conversion tables available with the following three options:  
• Print—Prints the default pages  
• Detailed—Lets you enter individual red, green, and blue values and a specific increment of color  
• Reset—Lets you clear the existing information and enter new values  
The process can be duplicated for Cyan (C), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and Black (K) color conversion tables, too.  
Collectively, these values are known as CMYK color. The default increment is 10% for Black and 20% each for Cyan,  
Magenta, and Yellow.  
Embedded Web Server does not open  
Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTION  
Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
307  
CHECK THE ADDRESS ENTERED IN THE WEB BROWSER  
• Depending on the network settings, you may need to type “https://” insteadof “http://” before the printer  
IP address to access the Embedded Web Server. For more information, contact your system support person.  
• Make sure printer IP address is correct.  
TEMPORARILY DISABLE WEB PROXY SERVERS  
Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server. For  
more information, contact your system support person.  
Contacting customer support  
When you call customer support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the display, and the  
troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.  
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside top  
front cover of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.  
In the U.S. or Canada, call 1‑800‑539‑6275. For other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at  
http://support.lexmark.com.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Notices  
308  
Notices  
Product information  
Product name:  
Lexmark X925, XS925  
Machine type:  
7541  
Model(s):  
032, 036, 096  
Edition notice  
November 2012  
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:  
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain  
transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.  
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the  
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or  
the programs described may be made at any time.  
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make  
these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to  
state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,  
or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification  
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the  
manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.  
For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com.  
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.  
© 2012 Lexmark International, Inc.  
All rights reserved.  
GOVERNMENT END USERS  
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R.  
2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R.  
12.212or48C.F.R.227.7202,asapplicable. Consistentwith48C.F.R. 12.212or48C.F.R. 227.7202-1through227.7207-4,  
as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S.  
Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users  
pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Notices  
309  
Trademarks  
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.,  
registered in the United States and/or other countries.  
PrintCryption and ScanBack are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.  
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a  
set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be  
compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application  
programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.  
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement  
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,  
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment  
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy  
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case  
the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.  
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended  
cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could  
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.  
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device,  
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for  
USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC  
regulations.  
Modular component notice  
This product may contain the following modular component(s):  
Lexmark regulatory type/model LEX‑M01‑003: FCC ID: IYLM01003; IC: 2376A‑M01003  
Lexmark regulatory type/model LEX-M05-001: FCC ID: IYLLEXM05001; IC: 2376A-M05001  
Lexmark regulatory type/model LEX-M05-002: FCC ID: IYLLEXM05002; IC: 2376A-M05002  
Licensing notices  
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the installation software CD.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Notices  
310  
Noise emission levels  
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.  
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.  
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA  
Printing  
Ready  
53 dBA  
39 dBA  
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.  
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive  
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European  
Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.  
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local  
sales office phone number.  
Product disposal  
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities  
for disposal and recycling options.  
Static sensitivity notice  
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the  
metal frame of the printer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notices  
311  
ENERGY STAR  
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply  
with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.  
Temperature information  
Ambient temperature  
15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F) and 8% to 80% RH  
-40°C to 43.3°C (110° Fahrenheit)  
Shipping and storage temperature  
Laser notice  
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for Class I  
(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.  
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is  
nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655-675 nanometers. The laser system  
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal  
operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.  
Power consumption  
Product power consumption  
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.  
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.  
Mode  
Printing  
Copy  
Description  
Power consumption (Watts)  
The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic inputs.  
650 W  
725 W  
The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy original  
documents.  
Scan  
The product is scanning hard‑copy documents.  
190 W  
130 W  
27 W  
Ready  
The product is waiting for a print job.  
Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode.  
Hibernate The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode.  
6.1 W  
Off  
The product is plugged into a wall outlet, but the power switch is turned off. .0 W  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Notices  
312  
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous  
power draws may be substantially higher than the average.  
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.  
Sleep Mode  
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering  
power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product  
is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.  
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes):  
5
By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes. Setting  
the Sleep ModeTimeout toa low value reduces energy consumption, but mayincrease theresponse timeof the product.  
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.  
Off mode  
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power  
consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the wall outlet.  
Total energy usage  
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in  
power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in  
order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.  
Industry Canada compliance statement  
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard  
ICES-003.  
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada  
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements  
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.  
European Community (EC) directives conformity  
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC and 2006/95/EC  
on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility  
and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits.  
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.  
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium  
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon  
request from the Authorized Representative.  
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Notices  
313  
Radio interference notice  
Warning  
This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements  
of EN55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.  
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user  
may be required to take adequate measures.  
Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council  
for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a  
product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone  
company.  
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.  
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the  
applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is  
provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your  
setup documentation for more information.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone  
line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most  
but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be  
connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved  
after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.  
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products,  
the REN is shown separately on the label.  
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that  
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will  
notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.  
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the  
operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to  
make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.  
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.  
at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the  
telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.  
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International,  
Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.  
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service  
commission, or corporation commission for information.  
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this  
equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment,  
consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.  
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer  
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is  
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Notices  
314  
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's  
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in  
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical  
surges.  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic  
device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or  
bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time itis sent and an identification  
of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending  
machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or  
any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)  
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.  
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network  
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is  
an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of  
an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of  
all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.  
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer  
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is  
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is  
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s  
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in  
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical  
surges.  
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.  
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada  
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number :  
numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés  
à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement  
limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur  
l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.  
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,  
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un  
problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans  
la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques  
nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire  
agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région  
ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.  
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.  
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network  
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal  
equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notices  
315  
to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above  
all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted  
equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network  
services.  
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.  
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.  
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom  
customers.  
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment  
associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance  
to Telecom's specifications:  
• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual  
call initiation, and  
• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the  
beginning of the next call attempt.  
• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not  
less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.  
Using this product in Switzerland  
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 14B5109 or 80D1877) to be installed on any line  
which receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The Lexmark filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all  
analog telephone lines in Switzerland.  
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse  
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 14B5109 ou  
80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé  
pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.  
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz  
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer  
14B5109 oder 80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden.  
Die Verwendung des Lexmark Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz  
Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind.  
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera  
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 14B5109 o 80D1877) da installare su tutte le  
linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro Lexmark poiché gli impulsi remoti sono  
presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notices  
316  
Notice to Users in the European Union  
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,  
2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to  
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio  
equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.  
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.  
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.  
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium  
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon  
request from the Authorized Representative.  
Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.  
Regulatory notices for wireless products  
This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters,  
for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.  
Exposure to radio frequency radiation  
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory  
agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for  
this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.  
Industry Canada (Canada)  
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that  
may cause undesired operation of the device.  
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited  
per regulations of Industry Canada.  
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from  
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to  
licensing.  
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF  
fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health  
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.  
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical  
specifications were met.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Notices  
317  
Industry Canada (Canada)  
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions  
suivantes :  
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles  
risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.  
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est  
strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.  
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement  
interdite.  
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur  
et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.  
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.  
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre  
aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au  
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.  
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme  
aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.  
Notice to users in the European Union  
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,  
2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to  
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio  
equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.  
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.  
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.  
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium  
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon  
request from the Authorized Representative.  
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.  
Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council  
directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the  
Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain  
voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.  
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notices  
318  
Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.  
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.  
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium  
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon  
request from the Authorized Representative.  
This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.  
AT  
EL  
LI  
BE  
ES  
LT  
SE  
BG  
FI  
CH  
FR  
LV  
SK  
CY  
CZ  
DE  
IE  
DK  
IS  
EE  
IT  
HR  
MT  
TR  
HU  
NL  
UK  
LU  
SI  
NO  
PL  
PT  
RO  
Česky  
Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními  
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.  
Dansk  
Deutsch  
LexmarkInternational,Inc. erklærerherved, atdetteproduktoverholderdevæsentligekravogøvrige relevante  
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.  
Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den  
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG  
befindet.  
Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ  
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ  
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.  
English  
Español  
Eesti  
Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the  
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.  
Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos  
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.  
Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ  
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.  
Suomi  
Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten  
ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.  
Français  
Magyar  
Íslenska  
Italiano  
Latviski  
Lietuvių  
Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences  
fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.  
Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ  
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.  
Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar  
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.  
Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti  
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.  
Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām  
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.  
Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas  
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notices  
319  
Malti  
Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet  
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.  
Nederlands Hierbijverklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat hettoestel ditproductinovereenstemmingismetdeessentiële  
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.  
Norsk  
Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og  
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.  
Polski  
Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi  
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.  
Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras  
disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.  
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky  
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.  
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi  
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.  
Svenska  
Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga  
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.  
Statement of Limited Warranty  
Lexmark X925, XS925  
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY  
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-  
specific warranty information that came with your product.  
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from  
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”  
Limited warranty  
Lexmark warrants that this product:  
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts  
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship  
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair  
or replacement (at Lexmark's option).  
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product  
for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the  
product.  
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user  
for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that  
user.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notices  
320  
Limited warranty service  
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later  
provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end  
earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed.  
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver  
your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.  
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.  
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the  
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.  
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.  
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not  
included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions,  
liens, and encumbrances.  
Before youpresentthisproduct for warranty service, removeallprint cartridges, programs, data, andremovable storage  
media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).  
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact  
Lexmark on the World Wide Web at http://support.lexmark.com.  
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered  
by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.  
Extent of limited warranty  
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints  
produced by any product.  
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:  
—Modification or unauthorized attachments  
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance  
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment  
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer  
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle  
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications  
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts  
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark  
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR  
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH  
RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF  
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT  
MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO  
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,  
AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notices  
321  
Limitation of liability  
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or  
nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual  
damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.  
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product  
that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real  
property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.  
This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any  
claim by you based on a third party claim.  
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its  
Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended  
beneficiaries of this limitation.  
Additional rights  
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation  
of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.  
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.  
LEXMARK SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT  
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT: BY USING THIS PRODUCT, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL  
THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT  
AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE  
PRODUCT UNUSED AND REQUEST A REFUND OF THE AMOUNT YOU PAID. IF YOU ARE INSTALLING THIS PRODUCT FOR  
USE BY OTHER PARTIES, YOU AGREE TO INFORM THE USERS THAT USE OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES ACCEPTANCE OF  
THESE TERMS.  
LEXMARK SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT  
This License Agreement (“Software License Agreement”) is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a  
single entity) and Lexmark International, Inc. (“Lexmark”) that, to the extent your Lexmark product or Software Program  
is not otherwise subject to a written software license agreement between you and Lexmark or its suppliers, governs  
your use of any Software Program installed on or provided by Lexmark for use in connection with your Lexmark product.  
The term “Software Program” includes machine-readable instructions, audio/visual content (such as images and  
recordings), and associated media, printed materials and electronic documentation, whether incorporated into,  
distributed with or for use with your Lexmark product.  
1 STATEMENT OF SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY. Lexmark warrants that the media (e.g., diskette or compact disk)  
on which the Software Program (if any) is furnished is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal  
use during the warranty period. The warranty period is ninety (90) days and commences on the date the Software  
Program is delivered to the original end-user. This limited warranty applies only to Software Program media  
purchased new from Lexmark or an Authorized Lexmark Reseller or Distributor. Lexmark will replace the Software  
Program should it be determined that the media does not conform to this limited warranty.  
2 DISCLAIMER AND LIMITATION OF WARRANTIES. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT  
AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, LEXMARK AND ITS SUPPLIERS PROVIDE THE  
SOFTWARE PROGRAM "AS IS" AND HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EITHER EXPRESS  
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notices  
322  
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND ABSENCE OF VIRUSES, ALL WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM. TO THE  
EXTENT LEXMARK CANNOT BY LAW DISCLAIM ANY COMPONENT OF THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, LEXMARK LIMITS THE DURATION OF SUCH  
WARRANTIES TO THE 90-DAY TERM OF THE EXPRESS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY.  
This Agreement is to be read in conjunction with certain statutory provisions, as that may be in force from time to  
time, that imply warranties or conditions or impose obligations on Lexmark that cannot be excluded or modified.  
If any such provisions apply, then to the extent Lexmark is able, Lexmark hereby limits its liability for breach of those  
provisions to one of the following: providing you a replacement copy of the Software Program or reimbursement  
of the price paid for the Software Program.  
The Software Program may include internet links to other software applications and/or internet web pages hosted  
and operated by third parties unaffiliated with Lexmark. You acknowledge and agree that Lexmark is not responsible  
in any way for the hosting, performance, operation, maintenance, or content of, such software applications and/or  
internet web pages.  
3 LIMITATION OF REMEDY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY AND ALL LIABILITY OF  
LEXMARK UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE GREATER OF THE PRICE PAID  
FOR THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM AND FIVE U.S. DOLLARS (OR THE EQUIVALENT IN LOCAL CURRENCY). YOUR SOLE  
REMEDY AGAINST LEXMARK IN ANY DISPUTE UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE TO SEEK TO  
RECOVER ONE OF THESE AMOUNTS, UPON PAYMENT OF WHICH LEXMARK SHALL BE RELEASED AND DISCHARGED  
OF ALL FURTHER OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITY TO YOU.  
IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK, ITS SUPPLIERS, SUBSIDIARIES, OR RESELLERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,  
INDIRECT, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS  
OR REVENUES, LOST SAVINGS, INTERRUPTION OF USE OR ANY LOSS OF, INACCURACY IN, OR DAMAGE TO, DATA  
OR RECORDS, FOR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, OR DAMAGE TO REAL OR TANGIBLE PROPERTY, FOR LOSS OF PRIVACY  
ARISING OUT OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM, OR  
OTHERWISE IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT), REGARDLESS OF  
THE NATURE OF THE CLAIM, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, TORT  
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY), AND EVEN IF LEXMARK, OR ITS SUPPLIERS, AFFILIATES, OR  
REMARKETERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY YOU BASED  
ONATHIRD-PARTYCLAIM, EXCEPTTOTHEEXTENTTHIS EXCLUSIONOFDAMAGESISDETERMINEDLEGALLYINVALID.  
THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE-STATED REMEDIES FAIL OF THEIR ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.  
4 U.S.A. STATE LAWS. This Software Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights  
that vary from state to state. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or the  
exclusion of limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you.  
5 LICENSE GRANT. Lexmark grants you the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of this  
License Agreement:  
a Use. You may Use one (1) copy of the Software Program. The term “Use” means storing, loading, installing,  
executing, or displaying the Software Program. If Lexmark has licensed the Software Program to you for  
concurrent use, you must limit the number of authorized users to the number specified in your agreement with  
Lexmark. You may not separate the components of the Software Program for use on more than one computer.  
You agree that you will not Use the Software Program, in whole or in part, in any manner that has the effect of  
overriding, modifying, eliminating, obscuring, altering or de-emphasizing the visual appearance of any  
trademark, trade name, trade dress or intellectual property notice that appears on any computer display screens  
normally generated by, or as a result of, the Software Program.  
b Copying. You may make one (1) copy of the Software Program solely for purposes of backup, archiving, or  
installation, provided the copy contains all of the original Software Program’s proprietary notices. You may not  
copy the Software Program to any public or distributed network.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notices  
323  
c Reservation of Rights. The Software Program, including all fonts, is copyrighted and owned by Lexmark  
International, Inc. and/or its suppliers. Lexmark reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this License  
Agreement.  
d Freeware. Notwithstanding the terms and conditions of this License Agreement, all or any portion of the  
Software Program that constitutes software provided under public license by third parties (“Freeware”) is  
licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the software license agreement accompanying such  
Freeware, whether in the form of a discrete agreement, shrink-wrap license, or electronic license terms at the  
time of download. Use of the Freeware by you shall be governed entirely by the terms and conditions of such  
license.  
6 TRANSFER. You may transfer the Software Program to another end-user. Any transfer must include all software  
components, media, printed materials, and this License Agreement and you may not retain copies of the Software  
Program or components thereof. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the  
transfer, the end-user receiving the transferred Software Program must agree to all these License Agreement terms.  
Upon transfer of the Software Program, your license is automatically terminated. You may not rent, sublicense, or  
assign the Software Program except to the extent provided in this License Agreement, and any attempt to do so  
shall be void.  
7 UPGRADES. To Use a Software Program identified as an upgrade, you must first be licensed to the original Software  
Program identified by Lexmark as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may no longer use the original  
Software Program that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility.  
8 LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING. You may not alter, decrypt, reverse engineer, reverse assemble, reverse  
compile or otherwise translate the Software Program, except as and to the extent expressly permitted to do so by  
applicable law for the purposes of inter-operability, error correction, and security testing. If you have such statutory  
rights, you will notify Lexmark in writing of any intended reverse engineering, reverse assembly, or reverse  
compilation. You may not decrypt the Software Program unless necessary for the legitimate Use of the Software  
Program.  
9 ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE. This License Agreement applies to updates or supplements to the original Software  
Program provided by Lexmark unless Lexmark provides other terms along with the update or supplement.  
10 TERM. This License Agreement is effective unless terminated or rejected. You may reject or terminate this license  
at any time by destroying all copies of the Software Program, together with all modifications, documentation, and  
merged portions in any form, or as otherwise described herein. Lexmark may terminate your license upon notice  
if you fail to comply with any of the terms of this License Agreement. Upon such termination, you agree to destroy  
all copies of the Software Program together with all modifications, documentation, and merged portions in any  
form.  
11 TAXES. You agree that you are responsible for payment of any taxes including, without limitation, any goods and  
services and personal property taxes, resulting from this Agreement or your Use of the Software Program.  
12 LIMITATION ON ACTIONS. No action, regardless of form, arising out of this Agreement may be brought by either  
party more than two years after the cause of action has arisen, except as provided under applicable law.  
13 APPLICABLE LAW. This Agreement is governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Kentucky, United States of  
America. No choice of law rules in any jurisdiction shall apply. The UN Convention on Contracts for the International  
Sale of Goods shall not apply.  
14 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software Program has been developed entirely at private  
expense. Rights of the United States Government to use the Software Program is as set forth in this Agreement and  
as restricted in DFARS 252.227-7014 and in similar FAR provisions (or any equivalent agency regulation or contract  
clause).  
15 CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Lexmark, its affiliates, and agents may collect and use information you  
provide in relation to support services performed with respect to the Software Program and requested by you.  
Lexmark agrees not to use this information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent necessary  
to provide such services.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notices  
324  
16 EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You may not (a) acquire, ship, transfer, or reexport, directly or indirectly, the Software  
Program or any direct product therefrom, in violation of any applicable export laws or (b) permit the Software  
Program to be used for any purpose prohibited by such export laws, including, without limitation, nuclear, chemical,  
or biological weapons proliferation.  
17 AGREEMENT TO CONTRACT ELECTRONICALLY. You and Lexmark agree to form this License Agreement  
electronically. This means that when you click the “Agree” or “Yes” button on this page or use this product, you  
acknowledge your agreement to these License Agreement terms and conditions and that you are doing so with the  
intent to “sign” a contract with Lexmark.  
18 CAPACITY AND AUTHORITY TO CONTRACT. You represent that you are of the legal age of majority in the place you  
sign this License Agreement and, if applicable, you are duly authorized by your employer or principal to enter into  
this contract.  
19 ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This License Agreement (including any addendum or amendment to this License Agreement  
that is included with the Software Program) is the entire agreement between you and Lexmark relating to the  
Software Program. Except as otherwise provided for herein, these terms and conditions supersede all prior or  
contemporaneous oral or written communications, proposals, and representations with respect to the Software  
Program or any other subject matter covered by this License Agreement (except to the extent such extraneous  
terms do not conflict with the terms of this License Agreement, any other written agreement signed by you and  
Lexmark relating to your Use of the Software Program). To the extent any Lexmark policies or programs for support  
services conflict with the terms of this License Agreement, the terms of this License Agreement shall control.  
MICROSOFT CORPORATION NOTICES  
1 This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions  
upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at  
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369.  
2 This product is based on Microsoft Print Schema technology. You may find the terms and conditions upon which  
Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=83288.  
ADOBE SYSTEMS INCORPORATED NOTICE  
Contains Flash®, Flash® Lite™ and/or Reader® technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated  
This Product contains Adobe® Flash® player software under license from Adobe Systems Incorporated, Copyright ©  
1995-2007 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC. All rights reserved. Adobe, Reader and Flash are trademarks of Adobe  
Systems Incorporated.  
Patent acknowledgment  
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property  
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher Suites for Transport  
Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.  
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property  
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA-256/382 and AES Galois  
Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.  
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property  
Rights(IPR) Disclosure ofCerticom Corp. atthe IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented  
in the product or service.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notices  
325  
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property  
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security  
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.  
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the  
Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS  
implemented in the product or service.  
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property  
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital  
Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.  
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property  
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the  
product or service.  
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property  
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 (IKEv1)  
implemented in the product or service.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
326  
Index  
550‑sheet tray (standard or  
optional)  
loading 82  
Numerics  
A
1565 Emulation error, load  
emulation option 268  
accessing the Embedded Web  
Server 30  
550‑sheet tray and printer stand  
200 paper jam 254  
201 paper jam 255  
203 paper jam 256  
230 paper jam 257  
231–239 paper jams 257  
24x paper jam 258  
250 paper jam 261  
accessing the system board 36  
Active NIC menu 160  
adding a date and time stamp 112  
ADF  
copying using 105  
ADF parts  
cleaning 234  
ADF pick roll  
ordering 241  
ADF separator roll  
ordering 241  
Adjusting color 263  
adjusting copy quality 109  
adjusting Sleep Mode 77  
adjusting toner darkness 96  
advanced options, touch‑screen  
copy 115  
installing 47  
550‑sheet tray, optional  
installing 53  
56 Parallel port [x] disabled 271  
56 Serial port [x] disabled 271  
56 Standard parallel port  
disabled 272  
56 Standard USB port disabled 272  
56 USB port [x] disabled 272  
57 Configuration change, some held  
jobs were not restored 272  
58 Input config error 272  
58 Too many disks installed 272  
58 Too many flash options  
installed 273  
58 Too many trays attached 273  
61 Remove defective disk 273  
62 Disk full 273  
80.xx Fuser life warning 274  
80.xx Fuser missing 274  
80.xx Fuser near life warning 273  
80.xx Replace fuser 274  
82.xx Replace waste toner  
bottle 274  
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly  
full 274  
83.xx Replace transfer module 274  
83.xx Transfer module life  
warning 274  
83.xx Transfer module missing 274  
84 Defective [color] imaging  
unit 275  
84 unsupported [color] imaging  
unit 275  
84.xx [color] imaging unit low 275  
84.xx [color] imaging unit nearly  
low 275  
84.xx Replace [color] imaging unit  
and [color] cartridge 275  
88.2x Replace [color] cartridge 276  
88.xx [color] cartridge low 275  
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly  
low 275  
280–289 paper jam 261  
290–292 paper jams 262  
30.xx Missing [color] cartridge  
and/or [color] imaging unit 268  
31.xx Missing or Defective [color]  
cartridge 268  
32.xx [color] cartridge part number  
unsupported by device 268  
34 Incorrect paper size, open  
[src] 269  
35 Insufficient memory to support  
Resource Save feature 269  
36 Printer service required 269  
37 Insufficient memory for Flash  
Memory Defragment  
operation 269  
37 Insufficient memory to collate  
job 269  
37 Insufficient memory, some Held  
Jobs were deleted 269  
37 Insufficient memory, some held  
jobs will not be restored 270  
38 Memory full 270  
39 Complex page, some data may  
not have printed 270  
fax 134  
FTP 141  
AppleTalk menu 165  
assigning a custom paper type  
name 89  
attaching cables 60  
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
using 22  
available internal options 35  
avoiding jams 92  
avoiding paper jams 252  
B
black‑and‑white printing 96  
blank pages 298  
451 paper jam 262  
blocking junk faxes 132  
buttons, printer control panel 23  
buttons, touch screen  
using 26  
51 Defective flash detected 270  
52 Not enough free space in flash  
memory for resources 270  
53 Unformatted flash detected 270  
54 Network [x] software error 271  
54 Serial option [x] error 270  
54 Standard network software  
error 271  
C
cables  
Ethernet 60  
USB 60  
calling customer support 307  
canceling  
55 Unsupported option in slot  
[x] 271  
print job, from computer 104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
327  
canceling a print job  
Confidential Print menu 174  
configuration information  
wireless network 63  
configurations  
reducing 109  
from a computer 104  
from the printer control  
panel 103  
canceling an e-mail 120  
cannot open Embedded Web  
Server 306  
card stock  
loading in multipurpose feeder 86  
tips 101  
Change [paper source] to [custom  
string] 264  
Change [paper source] to [custom  
string] load [orientation] 264  
Change [paper source] to [custom  
type name] 263  
Change [paper source] to [custom  
type name] load [orientation] 264  
Change [paper source] to [paper  
size] [paper type] 264  
Change [paper source] to [paper  
size] [paper type] load  
[orientation] 264  
checking an unresponsive  
printer 263  
checking an unresponsive  
scanner 282  
checking printer status  
on Embedded Web Server 249  
checking printer status using the  
Embedded Web Server 249  
checking status of supplies 239  
checking the status of supplies 239  
checking the virtual display  
using the Embedded Web  
Server 249  
checking virtual display  
using the Embedded Web  
Server 249  
choosing a fax connection 124  
cleaning  
ADF parts 234  
exterior of the printer 233  
scanner glass 233  
selecting a tray 107  
to a different size 107  
using the ADF 105  
using the scanner glass  
(flatbed) 106  
copying different paper sizes 108  
copying multiple pages on one  
sheet 111  
copying on both sides of the paper  
(duplexing) 108  
copying on letterhead 106  
copying on transparencies 106  
copying photos 106  
corrupted printer hard disk 265  
creating a fax destination shortcut  
using the Embedded Web  
Server 128  
creating an FTP shortcut  
using the Embedded Web  
Server 137  
creating profiles  
using the ScanBack Utility 143  
custom name  
printer 19  
Configure MP menu 153  
configuring e‑mail settings 116  
configuring port settings 71  
connecting printer to distinctive  
ring service 126  
connecting the printer to  
regional adapters 126  
conservation settings  
brightness, adjusting 78  
Eco‑Mode 76  
Quiet Mode 76  
Sleep Mode 77, 78  
standard exit bin lighting 79  
conserving supplies 75  
contacting customer support 307  
control panel, printer 23  
copy quality  
adjusting 109  
copy screen  
advanced options 115  
options 113, 114, 115, 140  
Copy Settings menu 187  
copy troubleshooting  
copier does not respond 279  
partial document or photo  
copies 281  
poor copy quality 280  
poor scanned image quality 283  
scanner unit does not close 280  
copying  
adding a date and time stamp 112  
adding an overlay message 112  
adjusting quality 109  
canceling a copy job 112, 113  
collating copies 110  
custom job (job build) 111  
different paper sizes 108  
enlarging 109  
multiple pages on one sheet 111  
on both sides of the paper  
(duplexing) 108  
on letterhead 106  
on transparencies 106  
photos 106  
placing separator sheets between  
copies 110  
quick copy 105  
configuring 89  
Custom Names menu 157  
custom paper type name  
creating 89  
Custom Scan Sizes menu 157  
Custom Type [x]  
changing name 89  
changing paper type 89  
Custom Types menu 157  
D
date and time, fax  
setting 127  
daylight savings time, faxing 128  
Default Source menu 149  
different paper sizes, copying 108  
directory list  
printing 103  
disk wiping 231  
Disk Wiping menu 175  
display troubleshooting  
display is blank 276  
display shows only diamonds 276  
display, printer control panel 23  
adjusting brightness 78  
disposing of printer hard disk 230  
distinctive ring service, fax  
connecting to 126  
cleaning the printhead lenses 235  
Close [tray] door 264  
Close front or side door 265  
collating copies 110  
confidential print jobs 101  
printing from a Macintosh  
computer 102  
printing from Windows 102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
328  
documents, printing  
from Macintosh 96  
from Windows 96  
duplexing 108  
Ethernet port 60  
connecting to a DSL line 125  
connecting to a PBX or ISDN 125  
fax connections  
regional adapters 126  
fax log  
viewing 132  
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)  
menu 191  
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)  
menu 199  
fax screen  
advanced options 134  
options 133, 134  
fax troubleshooting  
caller ID is not shown 284  
can receive but not send  
faxes 287  
can send but not receive  
faxes 286  
cannot send or receive a fax 285  
received fax has poor print  
quality 287  
exporting a configuration  
using the Embedded Web  
Server 31  
exporting a configuration using the  
Embedded Web Server 31  
exterior of the printer  
cleaning 233  
E
Eco‑Mode setting 76  
Edit Security Setups menu 172  
Embedded Web Server  
accessing 30, 249  
e‑mail  
canceling 120  
e‑mail alert  
administrator settings 249  
checking printer status 249  
checking supplies 239  
creating a fax destination  
shortcut 128  
creating an FTP shortcut 137  
creating e‑mail shortcuts 117  
functions 249  
initial fax setup 123  
networking settings 249  
problem accessing 306  
setting up e‑mail alerts 250  
using 249  
Embedded Web Server  
Administrator's Guide  
where to find 249  
emission  
notices 309, 310, 312, 313, 316,  
317  
encrypting the printer hard  
disk 232  
enlarging a copy 109  
envelopes  
different paper is needed 250  
notice of low supply level 250  
notice of paper jam 250  
e‑mail function  
setting up 116  
e‑mail screen  
advanced options 122  
options 120, 121, 122  
E‑mail Settings menu 200  
e‑mail shortcuts, creating  
using the Embedded Web  
Server 117  
faxing  
e‑mail, sending  
blocking junk faxes 132  
canceling a fax job 132, 133  
changing resolution 131  
choosing a fax connection 124  
configuring the printer to observe  
daylight saving time 128  
creating shortcuts using the  
Embedded Web Server 128  
creating shortcuts using the touch  
screen 129  
distinctive ring service 126  
fax setup 123  
forwarding faxes 135  
holding faxes 135  
making a fax lighter or darker 131  
sending a fax 129  
sending a fax at a scheduled  
time 131  
sending using the touch  
screen 129  
setting the date and time 127  
setting the fax number or station  
number 127  
using a shortcut number 118  
using the address book 118  
using the touch screen 118  
e‑mailing  
adding message line 119  
adding subject line 119  
changing output file type 119  
configuring e‑mail settings 116  
creating shortcuts using the  
Embedded Web Server 117  
creating shortcuts using the touch  
screen 117  
loading in multipurpose feeder 86  
tips on using 100  
environmental settings  
brightness, adjusting 78  
conserving supplies 75  
Eco‑Mode 76  
setting up e‑mail function 116  
using a shortcut number 118  
using the address book 118  
using the touch screen 118  
Hibernate Mode 78  
Quiet Mode 76  
F
Sleep Mode 77  
standard exit bin lighting 79  
erasing hard disk memory 231  
erasing non‑volatile memory 231  
erasing volatile memory 230  
Ethernet network setup  
using Macintosh 68  
using Windows 68  
Ethernet networking  
Macintosh 68  
Windows 68  
factory defaults  
restoring 251  
FAQ about color printing 303  
fax and e‑mail functions  
setting up 284  
setting the outgoing fax name or  
station name 127  
viewing a fax log 132  
FCC notices 309, 313, 316  
features  
fax and e‑mail functions are not set  
up 284  
fax connection  
connecting the printer to the wall  
jack 124  
Scan Center 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
329  
finding more information about the  
printer 17  
finding printer IP address 30  
Finishing menu 218  
firmware card  
installing 39  
flash drive  
printing from 97  
Flash Drive menu 210  
flash drives  
supported file types 98  
flash memory card  
installing 39  
troubleshooting 290  
font sample list  
printing 102  
Forms and Favorites  
setting up 32  
forwarding faxes 135  
FTP  
scanning using address book 139  
FTP address  
creating shortcuts using the touch  
screen 138  
showing icons 30  
home screen buttons and icons  
description 25  
J
jams  
avoiding 252  
locating jam areas 252  
locations 252  
numbers 252  
HTML menu 227  
I
Image menu 228  
jams, clearing  
imaging unit  
replacing 241  
imaging units  
ordering 240  
200 paper jam 254  
201 paper jam 255  
203 paper jam 256  
230 paper jam 257  
231–239 paper jams 257  
24x paper jam 258  
250 paper jam 261  
280–289 paper jam 261  
28x 234  
importing a configuration  
using the Embedded Web  
Server 31  
importing a configuration using the  
Embedded Web Server 31  
initial fax setup 123  
using the Embedded Web  
Server 123  
Install Tray [x] 265  
installing a memory card 37  
installing an Internal Solutions  
Port 40  
installing on a wireless network  
using Windows 64  
installing options  
290–292 paper jams 262  
451 paper jam 262  
Job Accounting menu 216  
L
labels, paper  
tips 100  
letterhead  
copying on 106  
FTP screen  
advanced options 141  
options 139, 140, 141  
FTP Settings menu 206  
fuser  
loading, multipurpose feeder 99  
loading, trays 99  
550‑sheet tray and printer  
stand 47  
light colored line, white line, or  
incorrectly colored line appears on  
prints 294  
light, indicator 23  
linking trays 88  
Load Manual Feeder with [custom  
string] 267  
Load Manual Feeder with [custom  
type name] 266  
Load Manual Feeder with [paper  
size] 267  
Load Manual Feeder with [paper  
type] [paper size] 267  
loading  
order of installation 46  
installing printer  
ordering 240  
on wireless network 64  
installing printer hard disk 44  
installing printer on a network  
Ethernet networking 68  
installing printer on a wireless  
network  
using Macintosh 66  
installing printer software  
adding options 62  
installing printer software  
(Windows) 61  
G
General Settings menu 178  
Green settings  
Eco‑Mode 76  
Quiet Mode 76  
green settings  
Hibernate Mode 78  
H
held jobs 101  
installing trays  
printing from a Macintosh  
computer 102  
printing from Windows 102  
Help menu 228  
Hibernate Mode  
using 78  
hiding icons on the home screen 30  
holding faxes 135  
home screen  
550‑sheet tray (standard or  
550‑sheet tray 53  
internal print server  
troubleshooting 290  
Internal Solutions Port  
changing port settings 71  
installing 40  
troubleshooting 290  
IP address, printer  
finding 30  
optional) 82  
multipurpose feeder 86  
loading card stock  
in multipurpose feeder 86  
loading envelopes  
in multipurpose feeder 86  
loading letterhead  
paper orientation 99  
loading the multipurpose feeder 86  
hiding icons 30  
IPv6 menu 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
330  
loading the standard tray 82  
loading transparencies  
in multipurpose feeder 86  
PDF 223  
PostScript 224  
Quality 219  
Internal Solutions Port,  
installing 40  
list 35  
Reports 158  
Security Audit Log 176  
Serial [x] 169  
Set Date/Time 177  
Settings 215  
SMTP Setup menu 171  
Standard Network 160  
Standard USB 165  
Substitute Size 153  
Supplies 147  
memory card, installing 37  
memory cards 35  
M
printer hard disk, installing 44  
updating in printer driver 62  
options, touch‑screen  
copy 113, 114, 115, 140  
e‑mail 120, 121, 122  
fax 133, 134  
making copies using paper from  
selected tray 107  
max speed  
using 103  
max yield  
using 103  
memory  
FTP 139, 140, 141  
scan 144  
types installed on printer 230  
memory card  
installing 37  
troubleshooting 291  
menu settings page  
printing 61  
menus  
Active NIC 160  
AppleTalk 165  
Confidential Print 174  
Configure MP 153  
Copy Settings 187  
Custom Names 157  
Custom Scan Sizes 157  
Custom Types 157  
Default Source 149  
diagram of 146  
Disk Wiping 175  
Edit Security Setups 172  
E‑mail Settings 200  
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 191  
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) 199  
Finishing 218  
Flash Drive 210  
FTP Settings 206  
General Settings 178  
Help 228  
HTML 227  
Image 228  
TCP/IP 162  
Universal Setup 158  
Utilities 222  
Wireless 164  
XPS 223  
menus diagram 146  
Miscellaneous menu 173  
mobile device  
printing from 97  
moving the printer 247, 248  
moving your printer 18  
multipurpose feeder  
loading 86  
scan to computer 144, 145  
ordering  
toner cartridges 239  
ordering a fuser 240  
ordering a transfer module 240  
ordering a waste toner bottle 240  
ordering imaging units 240  
output file type  
changing 119  
P
paper  
characteristics 90  
different sizes, copying 108  
letterhead 91  
preprinted forms 91  
recycled 91  
saving 111  
selecting 91  
My MFP  
setting up 33  
N
Network [x] menu 160  
Network Card menu 162  
Network Reports menu 162  
network setup page  
printing 61  
storing 90, 92  
unacceptable 91  
Universal size setting 81  
using recycled 75  
Paper changes needed 267  
paper characteristics 90  
paper feed troubleshooting  
message remains after jam is  
cleared 291  
Networking Guide  
where to find 249  
noise emission levels 310  
non‑volatile memory 230  
erasing 231  
notices 309, 310, 311, 312, 313,  
314, 315, 316, 317, 318  
IPv6 163  
paper jams  
Job Accounting 216  
Miscellaneous 173  
Network [x] 160  
Network Card 162  
Network Reports 162  
Paper Loading 155  
Paper Size/Type 150  
Paper Weight 153  
Parallel [x] 167  
avoiding 252  
paper jams, clearing  
231‑239 paper jams 257  
24x paper jam 258  
250 paper jam 261  
280–289 paper jam 261  
28x 234  
290–292 paper jams 262  
451 paper jam 262  
Paper Loading menu 155  
O
optional 550‑sheet tray  
installing 53  
options  
firmware card 39  
firmware cards 35  
flash memory card 39  
PCL Emul 224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
331  
paper size  
setting 81  
Paper Size/Type menu 150  
paper sizes  
toner fog or background shading  
on the page 302  
toner rubs off 302  
30.xx Missing [color] cartridge  
and/or [color] imaging unit 268  
31.xx Missing or Defective [color]  
cartridge 268  
toner specks 302  
supported 93  
paper type  
setting 81  
paper types  
duplex support 95  
supported by printer 95  
where to load 95  
Paper Weight menu 153  
Parallel [x] menu 167  
PCL Emul menu 224  
PDF menu 223  
photos  
copying 106  
placing separator sheets between  
copies 110  
port settings  
configuring 71  
PostScript menu 224  
print job  
canceling, from computer 104  
print quality  
cleaning the ADF parts 234  
cleaning the printhead lenses 235  
cleaning the scanner glass 233  
print quality troubleshooting  
blank pages 298  
characters have jagged edges 292  
clipped images 292  
fine horizontal lines 293  
gray background 293  
light colored line, white line, or  
incorrectly colored line appears  
on prints 294  
poor transparency quality 303  
print irregularities 295  
print is too dark 296  
print is too light 297  
repeating defects appear on a  
page 298  
shadow images appear on  
prints 299  
skewed print 300  
solid color pages 300  
streaked horizontal lines appear  
on prints 301  
streaked vertical lines on  
prints 301  
uneven print density 303  
print troubleshooting  
error reading flash drive 276  
held jobs do not print 277  
incorrect characters print 278  
incorrect margins 293  
jammed pages are not  
reprinted 292  
job prints from wrong tray 278  
job prints on wrong paper 278  
jobs do not print 276  
Large jobs do not collate 279  
multiple‑language PDF files do not  
print 276  
32.xx [color] cartridge part  
number unsupported by  
device 268  
34 Incorrect paper size, open  
[src] 269  
35 Insufficient memory to support  
Resource Save feature 269  
36 Printer service required 269  
37 Insufficient memory for Flash  
Memory Defragment  
operation 269  
37 Insufficient memory to collate  
job 269  
37 Insufficient memory, some  
Held Jobs were deleted 269  
37 Insufficient memory, some held  
jobs will not be restored 270  
38 Memory full 270  
39 Complex page, some data may  
not have printed 270  
paper curl 295  
paper frequently jams 291  
print job takes longer than  
expected 278  
tray linking does not work 278  
unexpected page breaks  
occur 279  
printer  
configurations 19  
minimum clearances 18  
models 19  
moving 18, 247, 248  
selecting a location 18  
shipping 248  
printer control panel 23  
adjusting brightness 78  
factory defaults, restoring 251  
printer hard disk  
disposing of 230  
encrypting 232  
installing 44  
removing 45  
troubleshooting 290  
wiping 231  
printer hard disk encryption 232  
printer hard disk memory  
erasing 231  
51 Defective flash detected 270  
52 Not enough free space in flash  
memory for resources 270  
53 Unformatted flash  
detected 270  
54 Network [x] software error 271  
54 Serial option [x] error 270  
54 Standard network software  
error 271  
55 Unsupported option in slot  
[x] 271  
56 Parallel port [x] disabled 271  
56 Serial port [x] disabled 271  
56 Standard parallel port  
disabled 272  
56 Standard USB port  
disabled 272  
56 USB port [x] disabled 272  
57 Configuration change, some  
held jobs were not restored 272  
58 Input config error 272  
58 Too many disks installed 272  
58 Too many flash options  
installed 273  
58 Too many trays attached 273  
61 Remove defective disk 273  
62 Disk full 273  
printer information  
where to find 17  
printer IP address  
finding 30  
printer messages  
1565 Emulation error, load  
emulation option 268  
80.xx Fuser life warning 274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
332  
80.xx Fuser missing 274  
Load [src] with [custom  
string] 266  
Load [src] with [custom type  
name] 266  
Load [src] with [size] 266  
Load [src] with [type] [size] 266  
Load Manual Feeder with [custom  
string] 267  
Load Manual Feeder with [custom  
type name] 266  
Load Manual Feeder with [paper  
size] 267  
Load Manual Feeder with [paper  
type] [paper size] 267  
Paper changes needed 267  
Remove paper from standard  
output bin 267  
Replace separator pad 267  
Restore held jobs? 267  
Some held jobs were not  
restored 268  
Supply needed to complete  
job 268  
from Macintosh 96  
from Windows 96  
80.xx Fuser near life warning 273  
80.xx Replace fuser 274  
82.xx Replace waste toner  
bottle 274  
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly  
full 274  
83.xx Replace transfer  
module 274  
83.xx Transfer module life  
warning 274  
83.xx Transfer module  
missing 274  
84 Defective [color] imaging  
unit 275  
84 unsupported [color] imaging  
unit 275  
84.xx [color] imaging unit low 275  
84.xx [color] imaging unit nearly  
low 275  
84.xx Replace [color] imaging unit  
and [color] cartridge 275  
88.2x Replace [color]  
cartridge 276  
88.xx [color] cartridge low 275  
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly  
low 275  
Adjusting color 263  
an error has occurred with the  
USB drive 263  
Change [paper source] to [custom  
string] 264  
Change [paper source] to [custom  
string] load [orientation] 264  
Change [paper source] to [custom  
type name] 263  
Change [paper source] to [custom  
type name] load  
[orientation] 264  
max speed and max yield 103  
menu settings page 61  
network setup page 61  
printing a directory list 103  
printing a document 96  
printing a font sample list 102  
printing a menu settings page 61  
printing a network setup page 61  
printing confidential and other held  
jobs  
from a Macintosh computer 102  
from Windows 102  
printing from a flash drive 97  
printing from a mobile device 97  
printing in black and white 96  
publications  
where to find 17  
Q
Quality menu 219  
Quiet Mode  
print quality troubleshooting 293  
Tray [x] paper size  
unsupported 268  
Unsupported disk 268  
Unsupported USB device, please  
remove 265  
printer options troubleshooting  
cannot detect flash memory  
card 290  
cannot detect printer hard  
disk 290  
internal print server 290  
Internal Solutions Port 290  
memory card 291  
option does not work 289  
paper tray problems 289  
USB/parallel interface card 291  
printer problems, solving basic 263  
printer software, installing  
(Windows) 61  
R
recycled paper  
using 75, 91  
recycling  
Lexmark packaging 80  
Lexmark products 79  
toner cartridges 80  
reducing a copy 109  
reducing printer noise 76  
Remote Operator Panel  
setting up 33  
Remove paper from standard  
output bin 267  
removing printer hard disk 45  
repeat print jobs 101  
printing from a Macintosh  
computer 102  
printing from Windows 102  
Replace separator pad 267  
replacing a toner cartridge 244  
replacing an imaging unit 241  
replacing supplies  
imaging unit 241  
toner cartridge 244  
waste toner bottle 246  
Change [paper source] to [paper  
size] [paper type] 264  
Change [paper source] to [paper  
size] [paper type] load  
[orientation] 264  
Close [tray] door 264  
Close front or side door 265  
Disk corrupted 265  
Disk near full. Securely clearing  
disk space. 265  
Disk problem 265  
Insert Tray [x] 265  
Install Tray [x] 265  
printhead lenses  
cleaning 235  
printing  
black‑and‑white 96  
canceling, from the printer control  
panel 103  
directory list 103  
font sample list 102  
from a mobile device 97  
from flash drive 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
333  
replacing the waste toner  
bottle 246  
reports  
using the Automatic Document  
Feeder (ADF) 22  
shortcuts, creating  
e‑mail 117  
using the scanner glass 22  
scanning to a computer 142  
scanning to a flash drive 143  
scanning to an FTP address  
creating shortcuts using the  
computer 137  
fax destination 128, 129  
FTP address 138  
FTP destination 137  
showing icons on the home  
screen 30  
viewing 250  
Reports menu 158  
reserve print jobs 101  
printing from a Macintosh  
computer 102  
Sleep Mode  
printing from Windows 102  
resolution, fax  
changing 131  
Restore held jobs? 267  
restoring factory default  
settings 251  
using shortcut numbers 138  
using the address book 139  
using the touch screen 138  
Security Audit Log menu 176  
selecting paper 91  
adjusting 77  
SMTP Setup menu 171  
Some held jobs were not  
restored 268  
standard exit bin  
lighting, setting 79  
Standard Network menu 160  
standard tray  
sending a fax 129  
sending a fax using shortcuts 130  
sending a fax using the touch  
screen 129  
sending fax  
using shortcuts 130  
using the address book 130  
sending fax at a scheduled  
time 131  
sending fax using the address  
book 130  
Serial [x] menu 169  
serial printing  
setting up 72  
Set Date/Time menu 177  
setting  
TCP/IP address 162  
setting the fax number or station  
number 127  
S
loading 82  
safety information 15, 16  
saving paper 111  
Scan Center features 143  
scan screen  
Standard USB menu 165  
statement of volatility 230  
status of supplies  
checking 239  
storing  
paper 92  
options 144  
scan to computer  
advanced options, setting 145  
options 144, 145  
original size 144  
paper orientation, setting 145  
Scan to Network  
supplies 238  
storing print jobs 101  
streaked horizontal lines appear on  
prints 301  
subject and message information  
adding to e‑mail 119  
Substitute Size menu 153  
supplies  
checking status 239  
checking, from printer control  
panel 239  
checking, using the Embedded  
Web Server 239  
conserving 75  
storing 238  
using recycled paper 75  
Supplies menu 147  
supplies, ordering  
setting up 32  
scan troubleshooting  
cannot scan from a computer 284  
partial document or photo  
scans 283  
scan was not successful 282  
scanner unit does not close 280  
scanning takes too long or freezes  
the computer 282  
ScanBack Utility  
using 143  
scanner  
functions 21  
scanner glass  
cleaning 233  
using 22  
scanner glass (flatbed)  
copying using 106  
scanning  
from a flash drive 143  
quick copy 105  
to a computer 142  
to an FTP address 138  
to an FTP, using address book 139  
setting the outgoing fax name or  
station name 127  
setting the paper size 81  
setting the paper type 81  
setting the Universal paper size 81  
setting up e‑mail alerts  
using the Embedded Web  
Server 250  
setting up fax and e‑mail  
functions 284  
ADF pick roll 241  
ADF separator roll 241  
fuser 240  
setting up serial printing 72  
setting up the printer  
on an Ethernet network  
(Macintosh only) 68  
on an Ethernet network (Windows  
only) 68  
Settings menu 215  
shadow images appear on  
prints 299  
imaging units 240  
toner cartridges 239  
transfer module 240  
waste toner bottle 240  
Supply needed to complete job 268  
supported flash drives 98  
supported paper sizes 93  
shipping the printer 248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
334  
system board  
accessing 36  
checking an unresponsive  
printer 263  
unexpected page breaks  
occur 279  
system board cover  
reattaching 36  
checking an unresponsive  
scanner 282  
contacting customer support 307  
FAQ about color printing 303  
fax and e‑mail functions are not  
set up 284  
Scan to Network 288  
solving basic printer  
problems 263  
troubleshooting, copy  
copier does not respond 279  
partial document or photo  
copies 281  
poor copy quality 280  
poor scanned image quality 283  
scanner unit does not close 280  
troubleshooting, display  
display is blank 276  
display shows only diamonds 276  
troubleshooting, fax  
caller ID is not shown 284  
can receive but not send  
faxes 287  
can send but not receive  
faxes 286  
cannot send or receive a fax 285  
received fax has poor print  
quality 287  
troubleshooting, paper feed  
message remains after jam is  
cleared 291  
troubleshooting, print  
error reading flash drive 276  
held jobs do not print 277  
incorrect characters print 278  
incorrect margins 293  
jammed pages are not  
reprinted 292  
job prints from wrong tray 278  
job prints on wrong paper 278  
jobs do not print 276  
Large jobs do not collate 279  
multiple‑language PDF files do not  
print 276  
troubleshooting, print quality  
blank pages 298  
characters have jagged edges 292  
clipped images 292  
fine horizontal lines 293  
gray background 293  
light colored line, white line, or  
incorrectly colored line appears  
on prints 294  
poor transparency quality 303  
print irregularities 295  
print is too dark 296  
print is too light 297  
repeating defects appear on a  
page 298  
shadow images appear on  
prints 299  
skewed print 300  
solid color pages 300  
streaked horizontal lines appear  
on prints 301  
streaked vertical lines on  
prints 301  
toner fog or background shading  
on the page 302  
toner rubs off 302  
T
TCP/IP menu 162  
telecommunication  
notices 313, 314, 315, 316  
tips  
card stock 101  
labels, paper 100  
on using envelopes 100  
on using letterhead 99  
on using transparencies 99  
tips on using envelopes 100  
tips on using letterhead 99  
toner cartridge  
replacing 244  
toner cartridges  
ordering 239  
recycling 80  
toner darkness  
adjusting 96  
toner fog or background shading  
appears on the page 302  
touch screen  
buttons 26  
transfer module  
ordering 240  
transparencies  
copying on 106  
loading 99  
loading in multipurpose feeder 86  
tips on using 99  
using 99  
Tray [x] paper size  
unsupported 268  
tray linking  
assigning a custom paper type  
name 89  
tray unlinking  
assigning a custom paper type  
name 89  
trays  
linking 88  
unlinking 88  
troubleshooting  
an application error has  
occurred 288  
cannot open Embedded Web  
Server 306  
toner specks 302  
uneven print density 303  
troubleshooting, printer options  
cannot detect flash memory  
card 290  
cannot detect printer hard  
disk 290  
internal print server 290  
Internal Solutions Port 290  
memory card 291  
option does not work 289  
paper tray problems 289  
USB/parallel interface card 291  
troubleshooting, scan  
cannot scan from a computer 284  
partial document or photo  
scans 283  
scan was not successful 282  
scanner unit does not close 280  
scanning takes too long or freezes  
the computer 282  
paper curl 295  
paper frequently jams 291  
print job takes longer than  
expected 278  
tray linking does not work 278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
335  
Wireless menu 164  
wireless network  
configuration information 63  
installation, using Macintosh 66  
installation, using Windows 64  
wireless network setup  
in Windows 64  
U
understanding the home screen  
buttons and icons 25  
uneven print density 303  
Universal Paper Size  
setting 81  
Universal Setup menu 158  
unlinking trays 88  
Unsupported USB device, please  
remove 265  
updating options in printer  
driver 62  
USB port 60  
USB/parallel interface card  
troubleshooting 291  
using Eco‑Mode 76  
using Hibernate Mode 78  
using max speed and max yield 103  
using Quiet Mode 76  
using recycled paper 75  
using shortcuts  
wireless printer setup  
in Macintosh 66  
WS‑Scan  
about 33  
X
XPS menu 223  
sending fax 130  
using the address book 118  
sending fax 130  
using the Embedded Web  
Server 249  
using the ScanBack Utility 143  
using the touch‑screen buttons 26  
Utilities menu 222  
V
verify print jobs 101  
printing from a Macintosh  
computer 102  
printing from Windows 102  
viewing  
reports 250  
viewing a fax log 132  
virtual display  
checking, using Embedded Web  
Server 249  
volatile memory 230  
erasing 230  
volatility  
statement of 230  
W
waste toner bottle  
ordering 240  
replacing 246  
wiping the printer hard disk 231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Lasko Fan 2108 User Manual
Lennox Hearth Indoor Fireplace ULC S610 User Manual
LG Electronics Cell Phone U880 User Manual
Lightolier Indoor Furnishings TSF Series User Manual
Marantz Home Theater System NR1602 User Manual
Maytag Dishwasher 760S User Manual
McCulloch Lawn Mower 966564001 User Manual
Melissa Hair Dryer 235 019 User Manual
Melissa Juicer 244002 User Manual
Microsoft Laptop Version 20 User Manual